Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

and he will complete

  • 1 σφραγίζω

    + V 1-2-7-17-7=34 Dt 32,34; 1 Kgs 20(21),8; 2 Kgs 22,4; Is 8,16; 29,11
    A: to (en)close with a seal, to seal [τι] Dt 32,34; to authenticate a document with a seal [τι] Jer 39(32),11; to set an end or limit to [τι] DnTh 9,24(primo); to seal up [τι] (in order to keep it secret) Jb 14,17
    M: to (en)close with a seal, to seal [τι] (in the case of a closed building, so that it cannot be opened) BelLXX 14; to authenticate a document with a seal [τι] 1 Kgs 20(21),8; to seal oneself Is 8,16, see also Jb 24,16
    *2 Kgs 22,4 καὶ σφράγισον and seal-וחתם for MT ויתם and he will complete?
    (→ἐναπο-, ἐπισφραγίζω, κατασφραγίζω,,)

    Lust (λαγνεία) > σφραγίζω

  • 2 βασιλεία

    βασιλεία, ας, ἡ (Heraclit. Fgm. 52; Hdt.+) a term relating to royal administration
    gener. kingship, royal power, royal rule (1 Km 15:28; 20:31; Sir 10:8; Jdth 1:1; Esth 3:6; 1 Macc 1:16 al. LXX; En 98:2; TestJob 33:9; Just., Tat., Ath.; οὐ βασιλείαν ἀλλὰ τυράνιδα Mel., P. 49, 354; Orig.) λαβεῖν ἑαυτῷ βασιλείαν obtain royal power (for oneself) Lk 19:12, 15; without dat. Rv 17:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 13, 220); δοῦναί τινι τὴν β. vs. 17; ἔχειν β. ἐπί τινων vs. 18; ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς βασιλείαν he gave us royal jurisdiction 1:6; cp. 5:10; royal rule Lk 1:33; 22:29; 23:42 v.l. (ἐν τῇ β. σου in your royal power); Ac 1:6; Hb 1:8 (Ps 44:7); 1 Cor 15:24 (παραδιδόναι as Diod S 1, 43, 6); B 4:4 (Da 7:24). Ps 95:10 (Justin, A I, 41, 4, D. 73: ὁ κύριος ἐβασίλευσεν ἀπὸ τ. ξύλου) is the basis for β. Ἰησοῦ ἐπὶ ξύλου the rule of Jesus on the cross B 8:5 (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.).—Hb 11:33; 1 Cl 61:1.
    esp. of God’s rule the royal reign of God (usually rendered ‘kingdom of God’, and oft. understood as royal realm but with dilution of the primary component of reigning activity), a chiefly eschatological concept, beginning to appear in the prophets, elaborated in apocalyptic passages (Mi 4:7f; Ps 102:19; 144:11–13; Wsd 6:4; 10:10; Da 3:54; 4:3; cp. SibOr 3:47f.—Diod S 5, 71, 1 Zeus takes over the βασιλεία from Cronus; Sextus 311 κοινωνεῖ βασιλείας θεοῦ σοφὸς ἀνήρ) and taught by Jesus. The expressions vary; β. τοῦ θεοῦ and τῶν οὐρανῶν have essentially the same mng., since Israelites used οὐρανός (-οί) as well as other circumlocutions for θεός (cp. Mt 19:23f; s. Bousset, Rel.3 314f); the latter term may also emphasize the heavenly origin and nature of the reign.—Dalman, Worte 75–119; JWeiss, D. Predigt Jesu v. Reiche Gottes2 1900, 1–35; ESellin, D. isr.-jüd. Heilandserwartung 1909, D. alt. Prophetismus 1912, 136ff; BDuhm, D. kommende RG 1910; SMowinckel, Psalmenstudien II 1922, 146ff; LDürr, Ursprung u. Ausbau d. isr. Heilandserwartung 1925; Bousset, Rel3 1926, 213ff; AvGall, βασιλεία τ. θεοῦ 1926; JWissing, Het begrip van het Koningrijk Gods, diss., Leiden 1927; HGressmann, Der Messias 1929; MBuber, Königtum Gottes ’32; PVolz, D. Eschatologie der jüd. Gemeinde im ntl. Zeitalter ’34; Ltzm., D. Weltheiland 1909; TManson, The Teaching of Jesus ’55, 116–284; SAalen, NTS 8, ’61/62, 215–40 (‘house’ or ‘community’ of God); GLadd, JBL 81, ’62, 230–38 (‘realm’); FNötscher, Vom A. zum NT ’62, 226–30 (ethical).
    α. β. τῶν οὐρανῶν mostly in Mt: 3:2; 4:17; 5:3, 10, 19f al.; otherw. (Did., Gen. 52, 11; 60, 28) J 3:5 v.l.; AcPl Ha 8, 31.
    β. β. τοῦ θεοῦ (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 3, 40, 21) Mt 6:33; 12:28; 21:31, 43; Mk 1:15; 4:11, 26, 30 al.; Lk 4:43; 6:20; 7:28; 8:1 al.; Ac 1:3; 8:12; 14:22; 19:8; 28:23, 31; J 3:3, 5; Ro 14:17 (defined as δικαιοσύνη, εἰρήνη, χαρά); 1 Cor 4:20 al.; Ox 1 verso, 7f; Dg 9:1; B 21:1; Pol 2:3; β. θεοῦ 1 Cor 6:10, cp. 9; 15:50; Gal 5:21; Pol 5:3; β. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ Eph 5:5; τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Cl 50:3.
    γ. β. τοῦ πατρός Mt 13:43; 26:29.
    δ. β. αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου) Mt 13:41; Lk 24:26 v.l.; cp. Col 1:13.
    ε. β. τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Δαυίδ Mk 11:10, since the Davidic kgdm. is to be reestablished under the Son of David, the Messiah (cp. Is 9:5f; Jer 23:5f).
    ζ. ἡ β. τοῦ κυρίου B 4:13; ἡ β. αὐτοῦ (=κυρίου) ἡ ἐπουράνιος 2 Ti 4:18; EpilMosq 5; ἡ οὐράνιος β. MPol 22:3; ἡ ἐν οὐρανῷ β. Dg 10:2.
    η. αἰώνιος β. τοῦ κυρίου (cp. Da 4:3; Just.; CIG II, 2715a, 3 ἐπὶ τῆς τῶν κυρίων Ῥωμαίων αἰωνίου ἀρχῆς, Dssm., B 277f) 2 Pt 1:11; cp. MPol 20:2.—The greatest blessings conceivable are found in the β. Mt 13:44f. The foll. expr. refer to obtaining it = participate in its benefits: ἅψασθαι τῆς β. B 7:11; δέχεσθαι Mk 10:15; διδόναι Lk 12:32; εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν β. Mt 5:20; 7:21; 18:3; 19:23; Mk 10:23ff; Lk 24:26 P75 (first hand); J 3:5; Ac 14:22; Hs 9, 12, 3f (HWindisch, D. Sprüche v. Eingehen in d. Reich Gs: ZNW 27, 1928, 163–92); εἰσήκειν εἰς τὴν β. 2 Cl 11:7; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν β. 9:6; ἑτοιμάζειν Mt 25:34; εὔθετον εἶναι τῇ β. Lk 9:62; εὑρεθῆναι εἰς τὴν β. Hs 9, 13, 2; ζητεῖν Mt 6:33; Lk 12:31; καταξιοῦσθαι τῆς β. 2 Th 1:5; κατοικεῖν ἐν τῇ β. Hs 9, 29, 2; κληρονομεῖν Mt 25:34; 1 Cor 6:9f; 15:50; IPhld 3:3; cp. κληρονόμος τῆς β. Js 2:5; μαθητεύεσθαι τῇ β. Mt 13:52; μεθιστάναι εἰς τὴν β. Col 1:13; φθάνει ἡ β. ἐπί τινα Lk 11:20. The phrase ὁρᾶν τὴν β. see the kgdm.=‘realize the fulfillment of God’s promises to Israel’ occurs Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 3:3; Hs 9, 15, 3. The mysteries of the kgdm. can be revealed to those for whom they are intended Mt 13:11; Mk 4:11; διαγγέλλειν Lk 9:60; διαμαρτυρεῖσθαι Ac 28:23; κηρύσσειν καὶ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι Lk 8:1; sim. 16:16; cp. κηρύσσειν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς β. Mt 4:23; 9:35; 24:14; κηρύσσειν τὴν β. Lk 9:2; Ac 28:31; λαλεῖν περὶ τῆς β. Lk 9:11. Keep fr. entering: κλείειν Mt 23:13; cp. κλεῖδες τῆς β. 16:19 (s. κλεῖς 1); αἴρειν ἀπό τινος 21:43.—Spoken of as present Mt 12:28; Lk 11:20, perh. also 17:20f (see s.v. ἐντός). Viewed as future, but close at hand ἤγγικεν ἡ β. Mt 3:2; 10:7; Mk 1:15; Lk 10:9, 11; perh. Mk 1:15; ἐγγύς ἐστιν Lk 21:31; ἔρχεται Mt 6:10; Mk 11:10; Lk 11:2; 17:20; μέλλει ἀναφαίνεσθαι 19:11; προσδέχεσθαι τὴν β. Mk 15:43; ἐκδέχεσθαι τὴν β. 2 Cl 12:1; μέλλει ἔρχεσθαι 1 Cl 42:3; ἡ μέλλουσα β. 2 Cl 5:5; ἥξει ἡ β. 12:2. Conceived of as a banquet (Billerb. IV 1154ff): ἀνακλιθῆναι ἐν τῇ β. Mt 8:11; sim. 26:29; Mk 14:25; Lk 13:28f; 22:16, 18, 30; cp. the parables 14:15ff; Mt 22:2ff. Participants in it are called υἱοὶ τῆς β. Mt 8:12 (of mere external connection); 13:38. Prerequisite for participation is μετάνοια Mt 4:17; Mk 1:15; the willingness to become like children Mt 18:3f; 19:14; Mk 10:14f; Lk 18:16f. Only uprightness will inherit the β. Mt 5:20. Degrees and grades 5:19; 18:1, 4. The prosperous have difficulty entering 19:23f; Mk 10:23–25; Lk 18:24f (cp. vs. 29), those who persist in sin have no prospects at all Mt 13:24ff, 36ff, 47ff.—Paul thinks of the β. as someth. that effects changes in pers. resulting in righteousness, peace (w. God) and joy Ro 14:17. It manifests itself in deeds, not in words 1 Cor 4:20. Those committed to sin will not inherit it 6:9f; Gal 5:21; Eph 5:5 (cp. 2 Cl 9:6); the latter passages show that for Paul the kgdm. is essentially future, since Christians await the complete victory of the spirit over the flesh. Cp. also 2 Ti 4:1. Flesh and blood will not inherit it, i.e. bodies under the direction of the spirit of Christ are required for entrance 1 Cor 15:50 (JJeremias, NTS 2, ’56, 151–59). None other than God calls people into it 1 Th 2:12.—HJWesterink, Het Koninkrijk Gods bij Pls ’37.—The most important lit. to 1931 in PFeine, Theol. d. NTs7 ’36, 73. Additional lit.: GGloege, Reich Gs u. Kirche im NT 1929; RFrick, D. Gesch. des R.-Gs-Gedankens in d. alten Kirche 1929; EScott, The Kgdm. of God in the NT ’31; H-DWendland, Reichsidee u. Gottesreich ’34; ROtto, Reich Gottes u. Menschensohn ’34 (Eng. tr., The Kgdm. of God and the Son of Man, tr. Filson and Woolf, ’43 and ’51); TW I 562–95; WKümmel, D. Eschatologie der Evangelien ’36, Verheissg. u. Erfüllg. ’45 and ’53; JHéring, Le Royaume de Dieu et sa Venue (Jesus, Paul) ’38 and ’59; JTheissing, D. Lehre Jesu v. d. ew. Seligkeit ’40; FGrant, The Gospel of the Kgdm. ’40; JWellhagen, Anden och Riket ’41 (Lk); WMichaelis, D. Herr verzieht nicht d. Verheissung ’42; RLiechtenhan, D. Kommen des RGs nach dem NT ’44; GKnight, From Moses to Paul, ’49, 173–87; WArndt, CTM 21, ’50, 8–29; JBright, The Kgdm. of God: The Biblical Concept and Its Mng. for the Church ’53; RSchnackenburg, Gottes Herrschaft u. Reich,4 ’65, tr. JMurray,2 ’68; ELadd, Jesus and the Kgdm., ’64; NPerrin, The Kgdm. of God in the Teaching of Jesus, ’66; MWolter, NTS 41, ’95, 541–63 [Lk].—OT background: WSchmidt, Königtum Gottes in Ugarit u. Israel, ’61; KBernhardt, D. Problem der altorientalischen Königs-Ideologie im AT, VetusT Suppl. 8, ’61.—Patristics: GLampe, JTS 49, ’48, 58–73.
    territory ruled by a king, kingdom (Diod S 4, 68, 4; Appian, Mithrid. 105 §496 ἡ βας. ὅλη=the whole kingdom; OGI 383, 25 [I B.C.]; Ps 67:33; 134:11; Bar 2:4; Tob 1:21; 1 Macc 1:6; 3:27; 2 Macc 9:25; 3 Macc 6:24 al. LXX) Mt 12:25f; 24:7; Mk 3:24; 6:23 (Socrat., Ep. 1, 10 τ. βασιλείας μέρος διδόναι); 13:8; Lk 11:17f; 21:10; αἱ β. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου IRo 6:1. In the account of the temptation Mt 4:8; Lk 4:5 (in a manner very different from Jesus, Alexander [Diod S 17, 51, 2] asks his father, Zeus Ammon, for τὴν ἁπάσης τῆς γῆς ἀρχήν and finds a hearing).—EDNT. DELG s.v. βασιλεύς. M-M. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > βασιλεία

  • 3 πλήρης

    πλήρης, ες (Aeschyl., Hdt.+).
    pert. to containing within itself all that it will hold, filled, full
    of things
    α. τινός with or of someth. (Diod S 2, 4, 2 λίμνη πλήρης ἰχθύων; Appian, Hann. 15 §66; PSI 422, 14 [III B.C.] ἡ γῆ ῥηγμῶν [fissures] πλ. ἐστίν; Num 7:26; Dt 6:11; Diog. L. 6, 37 πάντα ἐστὶ αὐτοῦ [= θεοῦ] πλήρη) baskets κλασμάτων πλ. full of pieces Mk 8:19; cp. 6:43 v.l. A vineyard βοτανῶν πλ. full of weeds Hs 5, 2, 3. Of a mountain ἀκανθῶν καὶ τριβόλων πλ. 9, 1, 5; πηγῶν πλ. vs. 8. Trees καρπῶν πλ. 9, 28, 1. πλήρης πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις τ. δόξης αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 34:6 (Is 6:3). εἰς συναγωγὴν πλήρη ἀνδρῶν δικαίων Hm 11:14.
    β. abs. ἑπτὰ σπυρίδες πλήρεις Mt 15:37; cp. 14:20 (GrBar 15:2 τἀ κανίσκια πλήρη). Of jars Hm 12, 5, 3ab.—ἐκ πλήρους (SIG 1104, 21 ἐποίησεν ἐκ πλήρους τὰ δίκαια; PTebt 106, 20 [II B.C.]; 281, 22; BGU 584, 6 and oft. in pap=‘in [the] full [amount]’. Acc. to CTurner, JTS 21, 1920, 198, note 1 this is a Latinism for ‘in pleno’) in full, in all fullness τι ἐκ πλ. Hv 2, 2, 6.
    of persons, w. gen. ἀνὴρ πλήρης λέπρας Lk 5:12 (=all covered w. it, as 4 Km 7:15; Is 1:15). Mostly full of a power, gift, feeling, characteristic quality, etc. (Eur., El. 384; Pla., Plt. 310d; Jos., Vi. 192 πλ. συνέσεως; Just., D. 93, 2.—Procop. Soph., Ep. 68 πλ. τοῦ θεοῦ) πλ. πνεύματος ἁγίου Lk 4:1; Ac 7:55. πλ. πνεύματος ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως 11:24; cp. 6:5. πλ. πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας vs. 3. πλ. χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας J 1:14 (s. this entry, end). πλ. χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως Ac 6:8. πλ. τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ MPol 7:3. πλ. ἔργων ἀγαθῶν rich in good deeds Ac 9:36. πάσης κακίας πλ. 1 Cl 45:7 (Maximus Tyr. 34, 3a πλ. κακῶν. Similarly Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 19 §69, who calls the murderers of Caesar φόνου πλήρεις). πλ. παντὸς δόλου Ac 13:10 (πλήρης δόλου Sir 1:30; 19:26; Jer 5:27). γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 19:28 (cp. Petosiris, Fgm. 21, ln. 29 πλῆρες τὸ ἀγαθὸν γενήσεται). πλ. ἁμαρτιῶν (cp. Is 1:4) Hs 9, 23, 4. πλ. πάσης ἁπλότητος Hv 1, 2, 4.—Of a heart (cp. 2 Ch 15:17; 1 Esdr 1:21) πλ. εἰδωλολατρίας B 16:7.— Surfeited (with) πλ. εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων I am surfeited with whole burnt offerings B 2:5 (Is 1:11).
    pert. to being complete and w. nothing lacking, complete, full, in full (Hdt. et al.; LXX; AssMos Fgm. e, Denis p. 65) μισθὸς πλ. (X., An. 7, 5, 5; Ruth 2:12. πλ. is a favorite word in the pap for a sum that is complete) 2J 8. πλ. σῖτος fully ripened grain (cp. the ‘fully developed’ στάχυες Gen 41:7, 22, 24) Mk 4:28 v.l. (other mss. πλήρης σῖτον, πλήρη ς.). νηστεία πλ. a complete fast Hs 5, 1, 3. πλ. πνεύματος ἔκχυσις a full outpouring of the Spirit 1 Cl 2:2.—Of persons who are complete in a certain respect or who possess someth. fully πλ. ἔν τινι: ἐν τούτοις πλ. 2 Cl 16:4. πλ. ἐν τῇ πίστει Hm 5, 2, 1; 12, 5, 4.—In some of the passages already mentioned πλήρης is indecl., though never without v.l., and almost only when it is used w. a gen., corresponding to an Engl. expression such as ‘a work full of errors’: τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ … πλήρης (referring to αὐτοῦ) χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας J 1:14 (cp. CTurner, JTS 1, 1900, 120ff; 561f). ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως Ac 6:5 (v.l. πλήρη). It is found as an itacistic v.l. in Mk 8:19; Ac 6:3, 5; 19:28, and without a gen. 2J 8 v.l. (s. N.25 app.). Examples of this use of πλήρης w. the gen. are found fr. the second century B.C., and fr. the first century A.D. on it is frequently found in colloq. H.Gk.: PLeid C II, 14 (160 B.C.). Wooden tablet fr. Egypt fr. the time of Augustus in RevArch 29, 1875, 233f=Sb 3553, 7; BGU 707, 15; POxy 237 IV, 14 (all three II A.D.); Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 499, 9 (II/III A.D.); En 21:7. S. the exx. in Crönert 179, 4 and also s. Mayser 63f (w. lit.); 297; Dssm., LO 99f (LAE 125ff); Thackeray 176f; Reinhold 53; Borger, GGA 139 (lit.); B-D-F §137, 1; Mlt. 50; Rob. 275f.—B. 931. Frisk. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πλήρης

  • 4 μή

    μή (Hom.+) negative particle, ‘not’: ‘μή is the negative of will, wish, doubt. If οὐ denies the fact, μή denies the idea’ (Rob. 1167). For the Koine of the NT the usage is simplified to such a degree that οὐ is generally the neg. used w. the indicative, and μή is used w. the other moods (B-D-F §426; Rob. 1167).
    marker of negation, not
    in negative clauses
    α. in conditional clauses after ἐάν Mt 5:20; 6:15; 10:13; 12:29; 18:3, 16, 35; 26:42; Mk 3:27; 7:3f; 10:30; 12:19; Lk 13:3, 5; J 3:2f, 5, 27 al. After ὸ̔ς ἄν (=ἐάν) Mt 10:14; 11:6; 19:9; Mk 6:11; 10:15; 11:23; Lk 8:18; 18:17. After ὅσοι ἄν Lk 9:5; Rv 13:15. After ὅστις ἄν Ac 3:23. After εἰ in a simple condition (B-D-F §428, 1) Lk 6:4; 1 Ti 6:3. After εἰ in a contrary to fact condition (B-D-F §428, 2; Rob. 1169) Mt 24:22; Mk 13:20; J 9:33; 15:22, 24; 18:30; 19:11; Ac 26:32; Ro 7:7. εἰ μή if not, except (that), εἰ δὲ μήγε otherwise with verb and elliptically (B-D-F §428, 3; 439, 1; Rob. 1024f; cp. POxy 1185, 30) Mt 5:13; 6:1; 9:17; 11:27; 12:4, 24 and very oft. (GHarder, 1 Cor 7:17: TLZ 79, ’54, 367–72).
    β. in purpose clauses ἵνα μή in order that…not Mt 5:29f; 7:1; 17:27; Mk 3:9; 4:12; Lk 8:10, 12; 16:28; J 3:20; 7:23; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8); 4:17; 24:4; Ro 11:25; 15:20 al. ὅπως μή in order that…not Mt 6:18; Lk 16:26; Ac 20:16; 1 Cor 1:29. μὴ ἵνα IRo 3:2. On the inf. w. neg. as periphrasis for purpose clauses s. below.
    γ. in result clauses ὥστε μή w. inf. foll. (cp. PHib 66, 5) so that not Mt 8:28; Mk 3:20; 1 Cor 1:7; 2 Cor 3:7; 1 Th 1:8; w. impv. foll. 1 Cor 4:5.
    δ. in interrog. clauses w. an element of doubt: δῶμεν ἢ μὴ δῶμεν; should we pay (them) or should we not? Mk 12:14.
    ε. in a few relative clauses (B-D-F §428, 4; Mlt. 171; 239f) διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ Tit 1:11 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Deor. 13, 1; PGM 4, 2653 ὸ̔ μὴ θέμις γενέσθαι; CPR I, 19, 17; 2 Macc 12:14; Sir 13:24). The literary language is the source of ᾧ μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα τυφλός ἐστιν 2 Pt 1:9, where the relat. clause has a hypothetical sense. ὅσα μὴ θέλετε Ac 15:29 D. Cp. Col 2:18 v.l. On ὸ̔ μὴ ὁμολογεῖ (v.l. ὸ̔ λύει) 1J 4:3 s. ARahlfs, TLZ 40, 1915, 525.
    ζ. in a causal clause contrary to the rule, which calls for οὐ: ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα J 3:18 (cp. Epict. 4, 4, 8; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 217 διήμαρτον, ὅτι μὴ ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἡμῶν βίβλοις ἐνέτυχον; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 8, 4; 11, 8; 32; Ath. 14, 2 ὅτι μὴ κοινῶς ἐκείνοις θεοσεβοῦμεν; Dio Chrys. 31, 94; 110.—B-D-F §428, 5; Mlt. 171; 239; Mlt-Turner 284; Rahlfs, loc. cit.).
    w. various moods
    α. w. inf. (B-D-F §399, 3; 400, 4; 5; Mlt-Turner 285f)
    א. after verbs expressing a negative concept, usu. omitted in translation ἀντιλέγοντες ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι Lk 20:27 (v.l. λέγοντες). ἀπαρνεῖσθαι 22:34. παραιτεῖσθαι Hb 12:19. ἐγκόπτειν τινά Gal 5:7. προσέχειν Mt 6:1. οὐ δύναμαι μὴ I can do nothing else than Ac 4:20.
    ב. gener., after verbs of saying, reporting, ordering, judging, etc.—in declarative clauses: after ἀποκρίνεσθαι Lk 20:7. λέγειν Mt 22:23; Mk 12:18; Lk 20:27 v.l.; Ac 23:8; AcPlCor 2:19. ὀμνύναι Hb 3:18. θέλειν Ro 13:3. χρηματίζεσθαι Lk 2:26.—In clauses denoting a summons or challenge: after λέγειν Mt 5:34, 39; Ac 21:4; Ro 2:22; 12:3. γράφειν 1 Cor 5:9, 11. κηρύσσειν Ro 2:21. παραγγέλλειν Ac 1:4; 4:18; 5:28, 40; 1 Cor 7:10f (w. acc.); 1 Ti 1:3; 6:17. αἰτεῖσθαι Eph 3:13. εὔχεσθαι 2 Cor 13:7 (w. acc.). χρηματίζεσθαι Mt 2:12. ἀξιοῦν Ac 15:38. βοᾶν 25:24.
    ג. after predicates that contain a judgment upon the thing expressed by the inf. (with or without the art.; cp. Just., D. 68, 8 ταῦτα τολμῶσι λέγειν μὴ οὕτως γεγράφθαι): καλόν (sc. ἐστιν) 1 Cor 7:1 (ApcEsdr 1, 6, 21); Gal 4:18; cp. Ro 14:21. ἄλογον Ac 25:27 (w. acc.). κρεῖττον ἦν 2 Pt 2:21. αἱρετώτερον ἦν αὐτοῖς τὸ μὴ γεννηθῆναι Hv 4, 2, 6. Cp. δεῖ Ac 27:21 (cp. use w. ἐχρῆν TestJob 37:6).
    ד. w. gen. of the subst. inf.: τοῦ μή that not (Lat. ne): after verbs of hindering κατέχειν Lk 4:42. παύειν 1 Pt 3:10 (Ps 33:14). καταπαύειν Ac 14:18. κωλύειν 10:47. κρατεῖσθαι Lk 24:16; cp. ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστιν τοῦ…μὴ ἐλθεῖν 17:1.—Also after other expressions: ὀφθαλμοὶ τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν eyes that should not see, ears that should not hear Ro 11:8, 10 (Ps 68:24). In place of a result clause: τοῦ μὴ εἶναι αὐτὴν μοιχαλίδα so that she commits no adultery, if... 7:3.
    ה. w. subst. inf. after prepositions: εἰς τὸ μή so that…not; to the end that…not Ac 7:19; 1 Cor 10:6; 2 Cor 4:4. W. acc. and inf. foll. 2 Th 2:2; 1 Pt 3:7.—διὰ τὸ μή because…not (PPetr II, 11, 1, 7 [III B.C.] τοῦτο δὲ γίνεται διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀθροῦν ἡμᾶς; 2 Macc 2:11; ApcMos 42 διὰ τὸ μὴ γινώσκειν; Just., D. 95, 1 διὰ τὸ μὴ πάντα φυλάξαι; Tat. 2, 1 διὰ τὸ μὴ βούλεσθαι) Mt 13:5f; Mk 4:5f; Lk 8:6; Js 4:2 (w. acc.).—πρὸς τὸ μὴ in order that…not (Ptolem. Pap. aus Alexandria 4, 3 in Witkowski p. 51 πρὸς τὸ μὴ γίνεσθαι τῷ βασιλεῖ τὸ χρήσιμον; Esth 3:13d, e; Bar 1:19; 2:5) 2 Cor 3:13; 1 Th 2:9; 2 Th 3:8.
    ו. w. dat. of the subst. inf. τῷ μή because…not 2 Cor 2:13.
    ז. w. nom. or acc. of the subst. inf. (2 Esdr 6:8; s. B-D-F §399, 3; s. Rob. 1038) Ro 14:13; 2 Cor 2:1; 10:2; 1 Th 4:6.
    β. very oft. w. the ptc., in keeping w. the tendency of later Gk. to prefer μή to οὐ; exceptions in B-D-F §430; s. Rob. 1172.
    א. μή is regularly used to negative the ptc. used w. the article, when the ptc. has a hypothet. sense or refers to no particular person, and has a general mng. (Artem. 4, 22 p. 215, 14 οἱ μὴ νοσοῦντες; ParJer 6:24 ὁ δὲ μὴ ἀκούων; Just., A I, 4, 2 τοὺς μὴ ἐλεγχομένους): ὁ μὴ ὢν μετʼ ἐμοῦ every one who is not with me Mt 12:30ab; Lk 11:23ab; ὁ μὴ πιστεύων J 3:18. πᾶς ὁ μή... Mt 7:26; 1J 3:10ab; 2J 9. πάντες οἱ μή 2 Th 2:12. μακάριοι οἱ μή J 20:29; cp. Ro 14:22. τῶν τὴν ψυχὴν μὴ δυναμένων ἀποκτεῖναι Mt 10:28b and oft.
    ב. w. the ptc. when it has conditional, causal, or concessive sense: πᾶν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν Mt 3:10; 7:19. Cp. 9:36; 13:19; Lk 11:24. θερίσομεν μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι we will reap, if we do not become weary (before the harvest) Gal 6:9. μὴ ὄντος νόμου when there is no law Ro 5:13. νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες although they have no law 2:14. μὴ ὢν αὐτὸς ὑπὸ νόμον though I am not under the law 1 Cor 9:20 (cp. TestAbr B 11 p. 115, 22 [Stone p. 78] μὴ ἰδὼν θάνατον). μὴ μεμαθηκώς without having learned (them) J 7:15 (cp. TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 1 [Stone p. 60] μὴ εἰδὼς τίς ἐστιν; TestJob 11:7 μὴ λαμβάνων…ἐνέχυρα; Just., A I, 5, 1 μὴ φροντίζοντες, D. 110, 2 μὴ συνιέντες). μὴ ἔχοντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀποδοῦναι but since he could not pay it back Mt 18:25. μὴ βουλόμενος since (God) did not wish to AcPlCor 2:12 (cp. TestAbrB 5 p. 109, 24f [Stone p. 66] μὴ θέλων…παρακοῦσαι).
    ג. when it is to be indicated that the statement has subjective validity (Just., D. 115, 3 ὡς μὴ γεγενημένου ἱερέως): ὡς μὴ λαβών as though you had not received 1 Cor 4:7. ὡς μὴ ἐρχομένου μου vs. 18.
    ד. but also very freq. where earlier Gk. would require οὐ (on developments s. Schwyzer II 595f; B-D-F §430, 3; Burton §485 [464 Z.]; cp. οὐ 2b; for μή here, cp. Just., A I, 3, 9, 3 ἄνδρες δεκαδύο…λαλεῖν μὴ δυνάμενοι; D. 85, 4 διὰ τοὺς μὴ…συνόντας ἡμῖν; Mel., P. 71, 518f): τὰ μὴ ὄντα what does not exist (in reality, not only in Paul’s opinion) Ro 4:17; 1 Cor 1:28 (Philo, Op. M. 81 τὸ τὰ μὴ ὄντα εἰς τὸ εἶναι παραγαγεῖν; Ath. 4:2 τὸ ὸ̓ν οὐ γίνεται ἀλλὰ τὸ μὴ ὄν); Hv 1, 1, 6. τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα what is unseen 2 Cor 4:18ab. τὰ μὴ δέοντα 1 Ti 5:13. τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα (3 Macc 4:16) Ro 1:28. τὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα Hb 12:27. τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 2 Cor 5:21. τυφλὸς μὴ βλέπων Ac 13:11. S. also μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει κατενόησεν Ro 4:19 where, as oft., the main idea is expressed by the ptc.
    in a prohibitive sense in independent clauses, to express a negative wish or a warning
    α. w. subjunctive let us not, we should not: pres. subj. μὴ γινώμεθα κενόδοξοι Gal 5:26. μὴ ἐγκακῶμεν 6:9. μὴ καθεύδωμεν 1 Th 5:6; cp. 1 Cor 5:8. W. aor. subj. μὴ σχίσωμεν αὐτόν J 19:24.
    β. w. optative (B-D-F §427, 4; Rob. 1170) μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 2 Ti 4:16 (cp. Job 27:5). ἐμοὶ δὲ μὴ γένοιτο καυχᾶσθαι Gal 6:14 (cp. 1 Macc 9:10; 13:5). Esp. in the formula μὴ γένοιτο (s. γίνομαι 4a) Lk 20:16; Ro 3:4, 31; 6:2, 15; 7:7, 13; 9:14; 11:1, 11; 1 Cor 6:15; Gal 2:17; 3:21.
    γ. w. pres. impv.
    א. to express a command that is generally valid (TestReub 2:10) μὴ γίνεσθε ὡς οἱ ὑποκριταί Mt 6:16; cp. vs. 19. μὴ μεριμνᾶτε τῇ ψυχῇ ὑμῶν vs. 25; Lk 12:22.—Mt 7:1; 10:31; 19:6; Lk 6:30; 10:4, 7; 1 Cor 6:9; 7:5, 12f, 18; Eph 4:26 (Ps 4:5), 29 and oft.
    ב. to bring to an end a condition now existing (Aeschyl., Sept. 1036; Chariton 2, 7, 5 μὴ ὀργίζου=‘be angry no longer’; PHib 56, 7 [249 B.C.]; PAmh 37, 7; POxy 295, 5; Wsd 1:12 and elsewh. LXX; TestAbr B 9 p. 113, 20 [Stone p. 74]; JosAs 14:11; GrBar 7:6 and ApcMos 16 μὴ φοβοῦ; Just., D. 87, 1 μὴ…λοιπὸν ὑπολάμβανε; Mlt. 122ff) μὴ φοβεῖσθε do not be afraid (any longer) Mt 14:27; 17:7; Lk 2:10; cp. 1:13, 30. μὴ κλαῖε do not weep (any more) 7:13; cp. 23:28 (GrBar16:1) μὴ σκύλλου do not trouble yourself (any further) 7:6; cp. 8:49 v.l. (TestAbr B 2 p. 107, 2 [Stone p. 62] μὴ σκύλλε τὸ παιδάριον).—9:50; Mk 9:39; J 2:16; 6:43. μὴ γράφε do not write (any longer)=it must no longer stand written 19:21. μή μου ἅπτου do not cling to me any longer = let go of me 20:17. μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος vs. 27.—Ac 10:15; 20:10; Ro 11:18, 20; 1 Th 5:19; Js 2:1 and oft.
    δ. w. aor. impv. (Od. 16, 301; Lucian, Paras. μὴ δότε; 1 Km 17:32; TestJob 45:1 μὴ ἐπιλάθεσθε τοῦ κυρίου) μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω Mt 24:18; Lk 17:31b. μὴ καταβάτω Mt 24:17; Mk 13:15; Lk 17:31a. μὴ γνώτω Mt 6:3.
    ε. w. aor. subj.
    א. almost always to prevent a forbidden action fr. beginning (Plut., Alex. 696 [54, 6] μὴ φιλήσῃς=‘don’t kiss’; PPetr II, 40a, 12 [III B.C.]; POxy 744, 11; BGU 380, 19; LXX; TestAbr A 2 p. 79, 8 [Stone p. 6] μὴ ἐνέγκωσιν ἵππους; 16 p. 97, 5 [Stone p. 42] μὴ ἐκφοβήσῃς αὐτόν; TestJob 39:11 μὴ κάμητε εἰκῇ; ParJer 3:5 μὴ ἀπολέσητε τὴν πόλιν; ApcEsdr 7:11 μὴ μνησθῇς; Just., D. 137, 1 μὴ κακόν τι εἴπητε.—This is the sense of μὴ θαυμάσῃς Herm. Wr. 11, 17; s. ב below) μὴ φοβηθῇς Mt 1:20; 10:26 (JosAs 23:15; cp. TestJob 17:6 μὴ φοβηθῆτε ὅλως). μὴ δόξητε 3:9; cp. 5:17. μὴ ἅψῃ Col 2:21. μὴ ἀποστραφῇς Mt 5:42. μὴ κτήσησθε 10:9 and oft. Also w. the third pers. of the aor. subj. μή τις αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ no one is to slight him 1 Cor 16:11. μή τίς με δόξῃ εἶναι 2 Cor 11:16. μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ 2 Th 2:3. μὴ σκληρύνητε Hb 3:8, 15 (quot. fr. Ps 94:8) is hardly a pres. subj.; it is rather to be regarded as an aor.
    ב. only rarely to put an end to a condition already existing (the pres. impv. is regularly used for this; s. above 1 cγב) (TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 19 [Stone p. 70] μὴ κλαύσῃς weep no more) μὴ θαυμάσῃς you need no longer wonder J 3:7 (‘you needn’t be surprised’: s. Mlt. 124; 126; and s. א above).
    ζ. in abrupt expressions without a verb (ParJer 1:7 μὴ κύριέ μου): μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ (we must) not (proceed against him) during the festival Mt 26:5; Mk 14:2. Cp. J 18:40. καὶ μὴ (ποιήσωμεν) Ro 3:8 (B-D-F §427, 4). μὴ ὀκνηροὶ (γίνεσθε) 12:11. Cp. 14:1; Gal 5:13; Eph 6:6 al. (B-D-F §481).
    after verbs of fearing, etc. that…(not), lest B-D-F §370.
    α. w. pres. subj. (3 Macc 2:23) ἐπισκοποῦντες…μή τις ῥίζα…ἐνοχλῇ Hb 12:15
    β. w. aor. subj. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) φοβηθεὶς μὴ διασπασθῇ Ac 23:10. Also after a pres. 27:17 (cp. Tob 6:15). After βλέπειν in the mng. take care (PLond III, 964, 9 p. 212 [II/III A.D.] βλέπε μὴ ἐπιλάθῃ μηδέν) Mt 24:4; Mk 13:5; Lk 21:8; Ac 13:40; 1 Cor 10:12; Gal 5:15; Hb 12:25. σκοπῶν σεαυτὸν, μὴ καὶ σὺ πειρασθῇς Gal 6:1. στελλόμενοι τοῦτο, μή τις ἡμάς μωμήσηται 2 Cor 8:20. ὁρᾶν Mt 18:10; 1 Th 5:15. Elliptically, like an aposiopesis ὅρα μή take care! you must not do that! Rv 19:10; 22:9 (B-D-F §480, 5; Rob. 932; 1203).
    γ. w. fut. ind. instead of the subj. following (X., Cyr. 4, 1, 18 ὅρα μὴ πολλῶν ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν χειρῶν δεήσει) βλέπετε μή τις ἔσται Col 2:8; cp. Hb 3:12
    taking the place of a purpose clause=so that…not: w. aor. subj. Mk 13:36; Ac 27:42; 2 Cor 12:6.
    marker of expectation of a negative anwer to a question (B-D-F §427, 2; 4; 440; Rob. 1168; 1175; Mlt-Turner 283).
    in direct questions (X. Eph. 398, 26 H.; Job 1:9; 8:11; TestAbr A 2 p. 79, 9f [Stone p. 6]; B 6 p. 110, 6 [Stone p. 68]; TestJob 15, 6; 27, 1; ApcSed 7:2; ApcMos 8:27) somewhat along the lines ‘it isn’t so, is it, that...?’, with expectation of a neg. answer; in tr. the negation can in fact be variously expressed in a form suggesting that an inappropriate answer would be met with complete dismay, e.g. μή τινος ὑστερήσατε; you didn’t lack anything, did you? Lk 22:35; μὴ λίθον ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ; will one give the person a stone? Mt 7:9; sim. vs. 10; 9:15; Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 11:11 v.l.; 17:9; J 3:4; 4:12, 33; 6:67; 7:35, 51f; 21:5 (cp. μήτι); Ac 7:28 (Ex 2:14), 42 (Am 5:25); Ro 3:3, 5 (cp. Job 8:3); 9:14, 20 (Is 29:16); 1 Cor 1:13; 9:8f; 10:22 al. μὴ γάρ J 7:41; 1 Cor 11:22.—In cases like Ro 10:18f; 1 Cor 9:4f μή is an interrog. word and οὐ negatives the verb. The double negative causes one to expect an affirmative answer (B-D-F §427, 2; s. Rob. 1173f; Tetrast. Iamb. 17, 2 p. 266 μὴ οὐκ ἔστι χλόη;=‘there is grass, is there not?’).
    in indirect questions whether…not Lk 11:35 (cp. Epict. 4, 5, 18a; Arrian, Anab. 4, 20, 2 μή τι βίαιον ξυνέβη=whether anything violent has happened [hopefully not]; Jos., Ant. 6, 115).
    marker of reinforced negation, in combination w. οὐ, μή has the effect of strengthening the negation (Kühner-G. II 221–23; Schwyzer II 317; Mlt. 187–92 [a thorough treatment of NT usage]; B-D-F §365; RLudwig: D. prophet. Wort 31 ’37, 272–79; JLee, NovT 27, ’85, 18–23; B-D-F §365.—Pla., Hdt. et al. [Kühner-G. loc. cit.]; SIG 1042, 16; POxy 119, 5, 14f; 903, 16; PGM 5, 279; 13, 321; LXX; TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 11 [Stone p. 46]; JosAs 20:3; GrBar 1:7; ApcEsdr 2:7; Just., D. 141, 2). οὐ μή is the most decisive way of negativing someth. in the future.
    w. the subj.
    α. w. aor. subj. (TestAbr A 17 p. 99, 7 οὐ μὴ δυνηθῇς θεάσασθαι; JosAs 20:3; ParJer 2:5; 8:5; ApcSed 12:5; 13:6; Just., D. 141, 2; Ael. Aristid. 50, 107 K.=26 p. 533 D.: οὐ μὴ ἡμῶν καταφρονήσωσι; Diogenes, Ep. 38, 5; UPZ 62, 34; 79, 19) never, certainly not, etc. Mt 5:18, 20, 26; 24:2; Mk 13:2; Lk 1:15; 6:37ab; 10:19; J 8:52; 10:28; 11:26; 13:8; 1 Cor 8:13; Hb 8:12 (Jer 38:34); 13:5; 1 Pt 2:6 (Is 28:16); Rv 2:11; 3:12; 18:21–23 al.—Also in a rhetorical question, when an affirmative answer is expected οὐ μὴ ποιήσῃ τὴν ἐκδίκησιν; will he not vindicate? Lk 18:7. οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό; shall I not drink it? J 18:11. τίς οὐ μὴ φοβηθῇ; who shall not fear? Rv 15:4.—In relative clauses Mt 16:28; Mk 9:1; Ac 13:41 (Hab 1:5); Ro 4:8 (Ps 31:2); cp. Lk 18:30.—In declarative and interrogative sentences after ὅτι Mt 24:34; Lk 22:16 (οὐκέτι οὐ μή v.l.); J 11:56; without ὅτι Mt 26:29; Lk 13:35.—Combined w. οὐδέ: οὐδʼ οὐ μὴ γένηται (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 122, 4 [6 A.D.]) Mt 24:21 (B-D-F §431, 3).
    β. w. pres. subj. Hb 13:5 v.l. ἐγκαταλείπω (accepted by Tdf., whereas most edd. read ἐγκαταλίπω)
    w. fut. ind. (En 98:12; 99:10; TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 11 [Stone p. 20] οὐ μή σοι ἀκολουθήσω; GrBar 1:7 οὐ μὴ προσθήσω; ApcEsdr 2:7 οὐ μὴ παύσομαι) οὐ μὴ ἔσται σοι τοῦτο Mt 16:22.—Hm 9:5; Hs 1:5; 4:7. Cp. Mt 15:6; 26:35; Lk 10:19 v.l.; 21:33; J 4:14; 6:35b; 10:5 (ἀκολουθήσωσιν v.l.); Hb 10:17. οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ εὑρήσουσιν Rv 18:14. οὐ γὰρ μὴ κληρονομήσει Gal 4:30 (Gen 21:10 v.l.); but the tradition wavers mostly betw. the fut. and aor. subj. (s. Mlt. and B-D-F loc. cit.).—DELG. M-M. EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μή

  • 5 παριστάνω

    παρίστημι/παριστάνω (the word since Hom.+; the later form παριστάνω [Ro 6:13, 16; but παρίστησι 1 Cor 8:8 v.l.; Ath. 33, 1] since Polyb. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 87; SIG 589, 46 [196 B.C.]; 814, 36 [67 A.D.]; 1109, 76.—B-D-F §93; Mlt-H. 202) pres. inf. παραστᾶν (Tat. 33, 1; Ath. 11, 3), ptc. pl. παριστῶντες (Tat. 1, 3—B-D-F §93); fut. παραστήσω; 1 aor. παρέστησα; 2 aor. παρέστην; pf. παρέστηκα, ptc. παρεστηκώς or παρεστώς; plpf. παρειστήκειν; inf. παρεστάναι (Dt 18:5; PsSol 2:36). Mid.: fut. παραστήσομαι. Pass.: 1 aor. παρεστάθην.
    trans. (pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act.) to cause to be present in any way
    place beside, put at someone’s disposal τινά or τί τινι someone or someth. to someone (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 7 Jac.; Socrates of Rhodes [I B.C.]: 192 Fgm. 1 p. 927, 25 Jac. [in Athen. 4, 148b]; Lucian, D. Mar. 6, 2) παραστήσει μοι λεγιῶνας Mt 26:53. τὶ someth. (cp. 2 Macc 12:3 v.l. σκάφη) κτήνη provide riding animals Ac 23:24. For protection παρέστησεν αὐτῇ τοὺς υἱούς αὐτοῦ he placed his sons at her side=Joseph placed Mary in the care of his sons GJs 18:1. Here belongs παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ θεῷ Ro 6:13b. W. dat. and double acc. (of the obj. and the pred.) ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους (εἰς ὑπακοήν) to whomever you yield yourselves as slaves (to obey him; w. acc., followed by εἰς=to or for [s. MTreu, Alkaios ’52, p. 12]) vs. 16; μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ vs. 13a; cp. vs. 19ab.
    present, represent
    α. lit. τινά τινι someone to someone παρέστησαν τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ Ac 23:33. παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ 2 Cor 11:2. Of the ‘presentation’ of Jesus in the Temple Lk 2:22 (Billerb. II 120–23. Cp. also Olympiodorus, Life of Plato, ed. AWestermann 1850 p. 1: of Plato, said to be of transcendent origin, λαβόντες οἱ γονεῖς βρέφος ὄντα τεθείκασιν ἐν τῷ Ὑμηττῷ βουλόμενοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ τοῖς ἐκεῖ θεοῖς … θῦσαι=his parents took him when he was an infant and placed him on Hymettus with the intent to sacrifice … to the gods there). W. dat. of pers., acc. of obj., and pred. acc. οἷς παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα to whom he presented himself alive Ac 1:3; without a dat., which is supplied fr. the context παρέστησεν αὐτὴν ζῶσαν 9:41.
    β. fig. παραστήσω σε κατὰ πρόσωπόν σου I will show you to yourself face to face 1 Cl 35:10 (Ps 49:21).
    ‘present’ becomes almost equivalent to make, render (Plut., Mor. 676c [ἡ πίσσα] τὸν οἶνον εὔποτον παρίστησι) ἵνα παραστήσῃ αὐτὸς ἑαυτῷ ἔνδοξον τὴν ἐκκλησίαν that (Christ) might render the church glorious before himself Eph 5:27. σπούδασον σεαυτὸν δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ θεῷ 2 Ti 2:15. παραστῆσαι ὑμᾶς ἁγίους κατενώπιον αὐτοῦ to make you holy before him Col 1:22. ἵνα παραστήσωμεν πάντα ἄνθρωπον τέλειον ἐν Χριστῷ that we may make everyone complete in Christ vs. 28.
    as a t.t. in the language of sacrifice offer, bring, present (παριστάναι θυσίαν, θύματα etc.: Epici p. 41, 49 B.=p. 19, 16 K.; Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Diod S 3, 72, 1; Lucian, Sacr. 13; Jos., Bell. 2, 89, Ant. 4, 113; SIG 589, 46 [196 B.C.]; 694, 49; 736, 70; OGI 456, 20; 764, 23; 38. The mid. is also used in this way since X., An. 6, 1, 22) fig. παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα θυσίαν ζῶσαν offer bodies as a living sacrifice Ro 12:1.
    as a legal t.t. bring before (a judge) (Sb 4512, 82 [II B.C.]; OGI 669, 49; BGU 163, 3; 341, 14; 747 II, 26; 759, 22; 1139, 18). Some would prefer to understand 1 Cor 8:8 in this sense: βρῶμα ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ θεῷ food will not bring us before (the judgment seat of) God. Likew. ἡμᾶς ἐγερεῖ καὶ παραστήσει σὺν ὑμῖν he will raise us and bring us, together with you, before him (=before his judgment seat) 2 Cor 4:14. But the forensic mng. is not certain in either of these places, and the sense is prob. bring before God = bring close to God (cp. Rtzst., ZNW 13, 1912, 19f).
    prove, demonstrate (Lysias 12, 51; X., Oec. 13, 1; Epict. 2, 23, 47; 2, 26, 4; Jos., Ant. 4, 47, Vi. 27; PLips 64, 34) οὐδὲ παραστῆσαι δύνανταί σοι περὶ ὧν νυνὶ κατηγοροῦσίν μου nor can they prove to you the accusations they are now making against me Ac 24:13.—On the 1 aor. pass. Hs 8, 4, 1 s. 2aγ end.
    intr. (mid. and perf., plpf., 2 aor. act., but s. also aγ end) to be present in any way, be present
    pres., fut., aor. (TestJos 2:6; 20:6; TestSol 6:1 and C 12:1; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 19 [Stone p. 54]; ApcMos 35; Mel., P. 62, 450).
    α. approach, come τινί (to) someone (Philo, De Jos. 94) Ac 9:39; 27:23 (Plut., Lysander 444 [20, 7] αὐτῷ κατὰ τοὺς ὕπνους παραστῆναι τὸν Ἄμμωνα).—Also as a t.t. of legal usage appear before, come before (s. 1e above.—Chariton 6, 6, 4 παρέστην δικαστηρίῳ) Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι you must appear before the Emperor (as judge) Ac 27:24; cp. 2 Ti subscr. πάντες παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ θεοῦ (v.l. Χριστοῦ) Ro 14:10. πάντας δεῖ παραστῆναι τῷ βήματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ Pol 6:2.
    β. of appearing with hostile intent (Appian, Illyr. 17 §51) abs. παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2).
    γ. come to the aid of, help, stand by τινί someone (Hom. et al.; X., Cyr. 5, 3, 19 al.; PKöln VI, 245, 22 σὺ δὲ θεὰ παρίστασο ‘and you, Goddess, be at my side’, w. suggestion of a relationship between Athena and Odysseus [for parallels and lit. s. ‘Ptocheia’ or ‘Odysseus in Disguise at Troy’ (=ASP 31), ed. MParca ’91, 59]; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 VI, 7; 12; Jos., Bell. 2, 245; SibOr 8, 407) Ro 16:2. ὁ κύριός μοι παρέστη 2 Ti 4:17 (cp. PHerm 125b, 8 [III A.D.] θεὸς παρίσταταί σοι; Jos., Ant. 1, 341; SibOr 3, 705).—The 1 aor. pass. παρεστάθην αὐτῷ Hs 8, 4, 1 is prob. used in act. sense I took a position beside him (so as to be ready for service).
    perf. and plpf. (En 14:22; PsSol 2:36; TestSol 14:2 al.; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 29 [Stone p. 16]; Just., D. 9, 1)
    α. of personal beings stand ( near or by), be present τινί (with) someone (LXX; TestJob 24:10; Jos., Bell. 2, 281) Ac 1:10; 1 Cl 34:6 (Da 7:10 Theod.). ἐνώπιόν τινος stand before someone (1 Km 16:21; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 29f [Stone p. 16]) οὗτος παρέστηκεν ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ὑγιής Ac 4:10.—Mostly in the ptc.: modifying a noun and followed by an indication of place: ὁ κεντυρίων ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐξ ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ Mk 15:39 (cp. 1 Macc 11:68 S). Γαβριὴλ ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 1:19 (cp. Jdth 4:14; Tob 12:15 S). Without indication of place (Diod S 17, 66, 7 παρεστὼς Φιλώτας=Philotas, who stood nearby; Diog. L. 2, 102; Aberciusins. 17; EpArist 19) εἷς παρεστηκὼς τῶν ὑπηρετῶν one of the servants who was standing by J 18:22. ἰδὼν τὸν μαθητὴν παρεστῶτα when he saw the disciple standing near 19:26. (ἄγγελοι) λειτουργοῦσιν παρεστῶτες 1 Cl 34:5. παρεστὼς ὁ κύριος MPol 2:2. οἱ παρεστῶτες αὐτῷ those standing near him Ac 23:2.—Subst. οἱ παρεστηκότες (PPetr II, 4, 6, 13 [III B.C.]) or οἱ παρεστῶτες (Diog. L. 9, 27) the bystanders, the spectators, those present Mk 14:47, 69f; 15:35 (vv.ll. παρεστώτων, ἑστηκότων); Lk 19:24; Ac 23:4; in vs. 2 the widely attested rdg. adds a dat.: τοῖς παρεστῶσιν αὐτῷ (cp. POxy 1204, 13 ὁ παρεστώς σοι).
    β. of a point of time be here, have come (Il. 16, 853; Demosth. 18, 90; 21, 101) παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός the time for the harvest is here Mk 4:29.
    γ. as an agricultural t.t. (cp. OGI 56, 68 ὅταν ὁ πρώϊμος σπόρος παραστῇ; PLille 8, 5) someth. like be fully grown σταφυλὴ παρεστηκυῖα a ripe grape (in contrast to ὄμφαξ) 1 Cl 23:4=2 Cl 11:3 (quot. of unknown orig.).—M-M. DELG s.v. ἵημι. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > παριστάνω

  • 6 παρίστημι

    παρίστημι/παριστάνω (the word since Hom.+; the later form παριστάνω [Ro 6:13, 16; but παρίστησι 1 Cor 8:8 v.l.; Ath. 33, 1] since Polyb. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 87; SIG 589, 46 [196 B.C.]; 814, 36 [67 A.D.]; 1109, 76.—B-D-F §93; Mlt-H. 202) pres. inf. παραστᾶν (Tat. 33, 1; Ath. 11, 3), ptc. pl. παριστῶντες (Tat. 1, 3—B-D-F §93); fut. παραστήσω; 1 aor. παρέστησα; 2 aor. παρέστην; pf. παρέστηκα, ptc. παρεστηκώς or παρεστώς; plpf. παρειστήκειν; inf. παρεστάναι (Dt 18:5; PsSol 2:36). Mid.: fut. παραστήσομαι. Pass.: 1 aor. παρεστάθην.
    trans. (pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act.) to cause to be present in any way
    place beside, put at someone’s disposal τινά or τί τινι someone or someth. to someone (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 7 Jac.; Socrates of Rhodes [I B.C.]: 192 Fgm. 1 p. 927, 25 Jac. [in Athen. 4, 148b]; Lucian, D. Mar. 6, 2) παραστήσει μοι λεγιῶνας Mt 26:53. τὶ someth. (cp. 2 Macc 12:3 v.l. σκάφη) κτήνη provide riding animals Ac 23:24. For protection παρέστησεν αὐτῇ τοὺς υἱούς αὐτοῦ he placed his sons at her side=Joseph placed Mary in the care of his sons GJs 18:1. Here belongs παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ θεῷ Ro 6:13b. W. dat. and double acc. (of the obj. and the pred.) ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους (εἰς ὑπακοήν) to whomever you yield yourselves as slaves (to obey him; w. acc., followed by εἰς=to or for [s. MTreu, Alkaios ’52, p. 12]) vs. 16; μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ vs. 13a; cp. vs. 19ab.
    present, represent
    α. lit. τινά τινι someone to someone παρέστησαν τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ Ac 23:33. παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ 2 Cor 11:2. Of the ‘presentation’ of Jesus in the Temple Lk 2:22 (Billerb. II 120–23. Cp. also Olympiodorus, Life of Plato, ed. AWestermann 1850 p. 1: of Plato, said to be of transcendent origin, λαβόντες οἱ γονεῖς βρέφος ὄντα τεθείκασιν ἐν τῷ Ὑμηττῷ βουλόμενοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ τοῖς ἐκεῖ θεοῖς … θῦσαι=his parents took him when he was an infant and placed him on Hymettus with the intent to sacrifice … to the gods there). W. dat. of pers., acc. of obj., and pred. acc. οἷς παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα to whom he presented himself alive Ac 1:3; without a dat., which is supplied fr. the context παρέστησεν αὐτὴν ζῶσαν 9:41.
    β. fig. παραστήσω σε κατὰ πρόσωπόν σου I will show you to yourself face to face 1 Cl 35:10 (Ps 49:21).
    ‘present’ becomes almost equivalent to make, render (Plut., Mor. 676c [ἡ πίσσα] τὸν οἶνον εὔποτον παρίστησι) ἵνα παραστήσῃ αὐτὸς ἑαυτῷ ἔνδοξον τὴν ἐκκλησίαν that (Christ) might render the church glorious before himself Eph 5:27. σπούδασον σεαυτὸν δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ θεῷ 2 Ti 2:15. παραστῆσαι ὑμᾶς ἁγίους κατενώπιον αὐτοῦ to make you holy before him Col 1:22. ἵνα παραστήσωμεν πάντα ἄνθρωπον τέλειον ἐν Χριστῷ that we may make everyone complete in Christ vs. 28.
    as a t.t. in the language of sacrifice offer, bring, present (παριστάναι θυσίαν, θύματα etc.: Epici p. 41, 49 B.=p. 19, 16 K.; Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Diod S 3, 72, 1; Lucian, Sacr. 13; Jos., Bell. 2, 89, Ant. 4, 113; SIG 589, 46 [196 B.C.]; 694, 49; 736, 70; OGI 456, 20; 764, 23; 38. The mid. is also used in this way since X., An. 6, 1, 22) fig. παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα θυσίαν ζῶσαν offer bodies as a living sacrifice Ro 12:1.
    as a legal t.t. bring before (a judge) (Sb 4512, 82 [II B.C.]; OGI 669, 49; BGU 163, 3; 341, 14; 747 II, 26; 759, 22; 1139, 18). Some would prefer to understand 1 Cor 8:8 in this sense: βρῶμα ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ θεῷ food will not bring us before (the judgment seat of) God. Likew. ἡμᾶς ἐγερεῖ καὶ παραστήσει σὺν ὑμῖν he will raise us and bring us, together with you, before him (=before his judgment seat) 2 Cor 4:14. But the forensic mng. is not certain in either of these places, and the sense is prob. bring before God = bring close to God (cp. Rtzst., ZNW 13, 1912, 19f).
    prove, demonstrate (Lysias 12, 51; X., Oec. 13, 1; Epict. 2, 23, 47; 2, 26, 4; Jos., Ant. 4, 47, Vi. 27; PLips 64, 34) οὐδὲ παραστῆσαι δύνανταί σοι περὶ ὧν νυνὶ κατηγοροῦσίν μου nor can they prove to you the accusations they are now making against me Ac 24:13.—On the 1 aor. pass. Hs 8, 4, 1 s. 2aγ end.
    intr. (mid. and perf., plpf., 2 aor. act., but s. also aγ end) to be present in any way, be present
    pres., fut., aor. (TestJos 2:6; 20:6; TestSol 6:1 and C 12:1; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 19 [Stone p. 54]; ApcMos 35; Mel., P. 62, 450).
    α. approach, come τινί (to) someone (Philo, De Jos. 94) Ac 9:39; 27:23 (Plut., Lysander 444 [20, 7] αὐτῷ κατὰ τοὺς ὕπνους παραστῆναι τὸν Ἄμμωνα).—Also as a t.t. of legal usage appear before, come before (s. 1e above.—Chariton 6, 6, 4 παρέστην δικαστηρίῳ) Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι you must appear before the Emperor (as judge) Ac 27:24; cp. 2 Ti subscr. πάντες παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ θεοῦ (v.l. Χριστοῦ) Ro 14:10. πάντας δεῖ παραστῆναι τῷ βήματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ Pol 6:2.
    β. of appearing with hostile intent (Appian, Illyr. 17 §51) abs. παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2).
    γ. come to the aid of, help, stand by τινί someone (Hom. et al.; X., Cyr. 5, 3, 19 al.; PKöln VI, 245, 22 σὺ δὲ θεὰ παρίστασο ‘and you, Goddess, be at my side’, w. suggestion of a relationship between Athena and Odysseus [for parallels and lit. s. ‘Ptocheia’ or ‘Odysseus in Disguise at Troy’ (=ASP 31), ed. MParca ’91, 59]; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 VI, 7; 12; Jos., Bell. 2, 245; SibOr 8, 407) Ro 16:2. ὁ κύριός μοι παρέστη 2 Ti 4:17 (cp. PHerm 125b, 8 [III A.D.] θεὸς παρίσταταί σοι; Jos., Ant. 1, 341; SibOr 3, 705).—The 1 aor. pass. παρεστάθην αὐτῷ Hs 8, 4, 1 is prob. used in act. sense I took a position beside him (so as to be ready for service).
    perf. and plpf. (En 14:22; PsSol 2:36; TestSol 14:2 al.; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 29 [Stone p. 16]; Just., D. 9, 1)
    α. of personal beings stand ( near or by), be present τινί (with) someone (LXX; TestJob 24:10; Jos., Bell. 2, 281) Ac 1:10; 1 Cl 34:6 (Da 7:10 Theod.). ἐνώπιόν τινος stand before someone (1 Km 16:21; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 29f [Stone p. 16]) οὗτος παρέστηκεν ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ὑγιής Ac 4:10.—Mostly in the ptc.: modifying a noun and followed by an indication of place: ὁ κεντυρίων ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐξ ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ Mk 15:39 (cp. 1 Macc 11:68 S). Γαβριὴλ ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 1:19 (cp. Jdth 4:14; Tob 12:15 S). Without indication of place (Diod S 17, 66, 7 παρεστὼς Φιλώτας=Philotas, who stood nearby; Diog. L. 2, 102; Aberciusins. 17; EpArist 19) εἷς παρεστηκὼς τῶν ὑπηρετῶν one of the servants who was standing by J 18:22. ἰδὼν τὸν μαθητὴν παρεστῶτα when he saw the disciple standing near 19:26. (ἄγγελοι) λειτουργοῦσιν παρεστῶτες 1 Cl 34:5. παρεστὼς ὁ κύριος MPol 2:2. οἱ παρεστῶτες αὐτῷ those standing near him Ac 23:2.—Subst. οἱ παρεστηκότες (PPetr II, 4, 6, 13 [III B.C.]) or οἱ παρεστῶτες (Diog. L. 9, 27) the bystanders, the spectators, those present Mk 14:47, 69f; 15:35 (vv.ll. παρεστώτων, ἑστηκότων); Lk 19:24; Ac 23:4; in vs. 2 the widely attested rdg. adds a dat.: τοῖς παρεστῶσιν αὐτῷ (cp. POxy 1204, 13 ὁ παρεστώς σοι).
    β. of a point of time be here, have come (Il. 16, 853; Demosth. 18, 90; 21, 101) παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός the time for the harvest is here Mk 4:29.
    γ. as an agricultural t.t. (cp. OGI 56, 68 ὅταν ὁ πρώϊμος σπόρος παραστῇ; PLille 8, 5) someth. like be fully grown σταφυλὴ παρεστηκυῖα a ripe grape (in contrast to ὄμφαξ) 1 Cl 23:4=2 Cl 11:3 (quot. of unknown orig.).—M-M. DELG s.v. ἵημι. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > παρίστημι

  • 7 ὡς

    ὡς (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.) relative adv. of the relative pron. ὅς. It is used as
    a comparative particle, marking the manner in which someth. proceeds, as, like
    corresponding to οὕτως=‘so, in such a way’: σωθήσεται, οὕτως ὡς διὰ πυρός he will be saved, (but only) in such a way as (one, in an attempt to save oneself, must go) through fire (and therefore suffer fr. burns) 1 Cor 3:15. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω ὡς ἑαυτόν Eph 5:33; cp. vs. 28. ἡμέρα κυρίου ὡς κλέπτης οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 Th 5:2. The word οὕτως can also be omitted ἀσφαλίσασθε ὡς οἴδατε make it as secure as you know how = as you can Mt 27:65. ὡς οὐκ οἶδεν αὐτός (in such a way) as he himself does not know = he himself does not know how, without his knowing (just) how Mk 4:27. ὡς ἀνῆκεν (in such a way) as is fitting Col 3:18. Cp. 4:4; Eph 6:20; Tit 1:5 (cp. Just., A I, 3, 1 ὡς πρέπον ἐστίν). ὡς πᾶσα γυνὴ γεννᾷ GJs 11:2; ὡς ἀπεκαλύφθη AcPlCor 1:8.
    special uses
    α. in ellipses (TestAbr A 12 p. 90, 22 [Stone p. 28] θρόνος … ἐξαστράπτων ὡς πῦρ; TestJob 20:3 χρήσασθαι … ὡς ἐβούλετο; JosAs 12:7 πρὸς σὲ κατέφυγον ὡς παιδίον ἐπὶ τὸν πατέρα) ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος I used to speak as a child (is accustomed to speak) 1 Cor 13:11a; cp. bc; Mk 10:15; Eph 6:6a; Phil 2:22; Col 3:22. ὡς τέκνα φωτὸς περιπατεῖτε walk as (is appropriate for) children of light Eph 5:8; cp. 6:6b. ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ as (it is one’s duty to walk) in the daylight Ro 13:13. The Israelites went through the Red Sea ὡς διὰ ξηρᾶς γῆς as (one travels) over dry land Hb 11:29. οὐ λέγει ὡς ἐπὶ πολλῶν ἀλλʼ ὡς ἐφʼ ἑνός he speaks not as one would of a plurality (s. ἐπί 8), but as of a single thing Gal 3:16.—Ro 15:15; 1 Pt 5:3. Also referring back to οὕτως (GrBar 6:16 ὡς γὰρ τὰ δίστομα οὕτως καὶ ὁ ἀλέκτωρ μηνύει τοῖς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ like articulate beings the rooster informs earth’s inhabitants) οὕτως τρέχω ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως I run as (a person) with a fixed goal 1 Cor 9:26a. Cp. ibid. b; Js 2:12.
    β. ὡς and the words that go w. it can be the subj. or obj., of a clause: γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις let it be done (= it will be done) for you as you wish Mt 15:28. Cp. 8:13; Lk 14:22 v.l. (for ὅ; cp. ὡς τὸ θέλημά σου OdeSol 11:21). The predicate belonging to such a subj. is to be supplied in οὐχ ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω (γενηθήτω) Mt 26:39a.—ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ ὁ ἄγγελος he did as (= that which) the angel commanded him (to do) Mt 1:24; cp. 26:19 (on the structure s. RPesch, BZ 10, ’66, 220–45; 11, ’67, 79–95; cp. the formula Job 42:9 and the contrasting negation Ex 1:17; s. also Ex 3:21f); 28:15.—Practically equivalent to ὅ, which is a v.l. for it Mk 14:72 (JBirdsall, NovT 2, ’58, 272–75; cp. Lk 14:22 above).
    γ. ἕκαστος ὡς each one as or according to what Ro 12:3; 1 Cor 3:5; 7:17ab; Rv 22:12. ὡς ἦν δυνατὸς ἕκαστος each person interpreted them as best each could Papias (2:16).
    δ. in indirect questions (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 11 ἀπαίδευτοι ὡς χρὴ συμμάχοις χρῆσθαι) ἐξηγοῦντο ὡς ἐγνώσθη αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου they told how he had made himself known to them when they broke bread together Lk 24:35. Cp. Mk 12:26 v.l. (for πῶς); Lk 8:47; 23:55; Ac 10:38; 20:20; Ro 11:2; 2 Cor 7:15.
    a conjunction marking a point of comparison, as. This ‘as’ can have a ‘so’ expressly corresponding to it or not, as the case may be; further, both sides of the comparison can be expressed in complete clauses, or one or even both may be abbreviated.
    ὡς is correlative w. οὕτως=so. οὕτως … ὡς (so, in such a way) … as: οὐδέποτε ἐλάλησεν οὕτως ἄνθρωπος ὡς οὗτος λαλεῖ ὁ ἄνθρωπος J 7:46. ὡς … οὕτως Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); 23:11; Ro 5:15 (ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα, both halves to be completed), 18. ὡς κοινωνοί ἐστε τῶν παθημάτων, οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως as you are comrades in suffering, so (shall you be) in comfort as well 2 Cor 1:7. Cp. 7:14; 11:3 v.l.—ὡς … καί as … so (Plut., Mor. 39e; Ath. 15, 2) Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; 2 Cor 13:2; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20.
    The clause beginning w. ὡς can easily be understood and supplied in many cases; when this occurs, the noun upon which the comparison depends can often stand alone, and in these cases ὡς acts as a particle denoting comparison. οἱ δίκαιοι ἐκλάμψουσιν ὡς ὁ ἥλιος the righteous will shine out as the sun (shines) Mt 13:43. ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε συλλαβεῖν με as (one goes out) against a robber, (so) you have gone out to arrest me 26:55 (Mel., P. 79, 574 ὡς ἐπὶ φόνιον λῄστην). γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι ὡς οἱ ὄφεις be (as) wise as serpents (are) 10:16b. Cp. Lk 12:27; 21:35; 22:31; J 15:6; 2 Ti 2:17; 1 Pt 5:8.
    Semitic infl. is felt in the manner in which ὡς, combined w. a subst., takes the place of a subst. or an adj.
    α. a substantive
    א. as subj. (cp. Da 7:13 ὡς υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἤρχετο; cp. 10:16, 18) ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου (ἦν) ὡς θάλασσα ὑαλίνη before the throne there was something like a sea of glass Rv 4:6. Cp. 8:8; 9:7a. ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν ὡς ἡ ἄμμος from one man they have come into being as the sand, i.e. countless descendants Hb 11:12.
    ב. as obj. (JosAs 17:6 εἶδεν Ἀσενὲθ ὡς ἅρμα πυρός) ᾂδουσιν ὡς ᾠδὴν καινήν they were singing, as it were, a new song Rv 14:3. ἤκουσα ὡς φωνήν I heard what sounded like a shout 19:1, 6abc; cp. 6:1.
    β. as adjective, pred. (mostly εἶναι, γίνεσθαι ὡς; the latter also in rendering of ךְּ to express the basic reality of something: GDelling, Jüd. Lehre u. Frömmigkeit ’67, p. 58, on ParJer 9:7) ἐὰν μὴ γένησθε ὡς τὰ παιδία if you do not become child-like Mt 18:3. ὡς ἄγγελοί εἰσιν they are similar to angels 22:30. πᾶσα σὰρξ ὡς χόρτος 1 Pt 1:24. Cp. Mk 6:34; 12:25; Lk 22:26ab; Ro 9:27 (Is 10:22); 29a (Is 1:9a); 1 Cor 4:13; 7:7f, 29–31; 9:20f; 2 Pt 3:8ab (Ps 89:4); Rv 6:12ab al. (cp. GrBar 14:1 ἐγένετο φωνὴ ὡς βροντή). Sim. also ποίησόν με ὡς ἕνα τῶν μισθίων σου treat me like one of your day laborers Lk 15:19.—The adj. or adjectival expr. for which this form stands may be used as an attribute πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως faith like a mustard seed=faith no greater than a tiny mustard seed Mt 17:20; Lk 17:6. προφήτης ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν Mk 6:15. Cp. Ac 3:22; 7:37 (both Dt 18:15); 10:11; 11:5. ἐγένετο ὡς εἷς τῶν φευγόντων AcPl Ha 5, 18. ἀρνίον ὡς ἐσφαγμένον a lamb that appeared to have been slaughtered Rv 5:6.—In expressions like τρίχας ὡς τρίχας γυναικῶν 9:8a the second τρίχας can be omitted as self-evident (Ps 54:7 v.l.): ἡ φωνὴ ὡς σάλπιγγος 4:1; cp. 1:10; 9:8b; 13:2a; 14:2c; 16:3.
    other noteworthy uses
    α. ὡς as can introduce an example ὡς καὶ Ἠλίας ἐποίησεν Lk 9:54 v.l.; cp. 1 Pt 3:6; or, in the combination ὡς γέγραπται, a scripture quotation Mk 1:2 v.l.; 7:6; Lk 3:4; Ac 13:33; cp. Ro 9:25; or even an authoritative human opinion Ac 17:28; 22:5; 25:10; or any other decisive reason Mt 5:48; 6:12 (ὡς καί).
    β. ὡς introduces short clauses: ὡς εἰώθει as his custom was Mk 10:1. Cp. Hs 5, 1, 2. ὡς λογίζομαι as I think 1 Pt 5:12. ὡς ἐνομίζετο as was supposed Lk 3:23 (Diog. L. 3, 2 ὡς Ἀθήνησιν ἦν λόγος [about Plato’s origin]; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 32 [Stone p. 12] ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ; Just., A I, 6, 2 ὡς ἐδιδάχθημεν). ὡς ἦν as he was Mk 4:36. ὡς ἔφην Papias (2:15) (ApcMos 42; cp. Just., A I, 21, 6 ὡς προέφημεν).
    γ. The expr. οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον Mk 4:26 may well exhibit colloquial syntax; but some think that ἄν (so one v.l. [=ἐάν, which is read by many mss.]) once stood before ἄνθρωπος and was lost inadvertently. S. the comm., e.g. EKlostermann, Hdb. z. NT4 ’50 ad loc.; s. also Jülicher, Gleichn. 539; B-D-F §380, 4; Mlt. 185 w. notes; Rdm.2 154; Rob. 928; 968.
    marker introducing the perspective from which a pers., thing, or activity is viewed or understood as to character, function, or role, as
    w. focus on quality, circumstance, or role
    α. as (JosAs 26:7 ἔγνω … Λευὶς … ταῦτα πάντα ὡς προφήτης; Just., A I, 7, 4 ἵνα ὡς ἄδικος κολάζηται) τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι; why am I still being condemned as a sinner? Ro 3:7. ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων 1 Cor 3:10. ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη as newborn children (in reference to desire for maternal milk) 1 Pt 2:2. μή τις ὑμῶν πασχέτω ὡς φονεύς 4:15a; cp. b, 16.—1:14; 1 Cor 7:25; 2 Cor 6:4; Eph 5:1; Col 3:12; 1 Th 2:4, 7a.—In the oblique cases, genitive (ApcSed 16:2 ὡς νέου αὐτοῦ ἐπαράβλεπον τὰ πταίσματα αὐτοῦ; Just., A I, 14, 4 ὑμέτερον ἔστω ὡς δυνατῶν βασιλέων): τιμίῳ αἵματι ὡς ἀμνοῦ ἀμώμου Χριστοῦ with the precious blood of Christ, as of a lamb without blemish 1 Pt 1:19. δόξαν ὡς μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρός glory as of an only-begotten son, coming from the Father J 1:14. Cp. Hb 12:27. Dative (Ath. 14, 2 θύουσιν ὡς θεοῖς; 28, 3 πιστεύειν ὡς μυθοποιῷ; Stephan. Byz. s.v. Κυνόσαργες: Ἡρακλεῖ ὡς θεῷ θύων): λαλῆσαι ὑμῖν ὡς πνευματικοῖς 1 Cor 3:1a; cp. bc; 10:15; 2 Cor 6:13; Hb 12:5; 1 Pt 2:13f; 3:7ab; 2 Pt 1:19. Accusative (JosAs 22:8 ἠγάπα αὐτὸν ὡς ἄνδρα προφήτην; Just., A I, 4, 4 τὸ ὄνομα ὡς ἔλεγχον λαμβάνετε; Tat. 27, 1 ὡς ἀθεωτάτους ἡμᾶς ἐκκηρύσσετε; Ath. 16, 4 οὐ προσκυνῶ αὐτὰ ὡς θεοὺς): οὐχ ὡς θεὸν ἐδόξασαν Ro 1:21; 1 Cor 4:14; 8:7; Tit 1:7; Phlm 16; Hb 6:19; 11:9. παρακαλῶ ὡς παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 Pt 2:11 (from the perspective of their conversion experience the recipients of the letter are compared to temporary residents and disenfranchised foreigners, cp. the imagery 1 Pt 1:19 above and s. παρεπίδημος and πάροικος 2).—This is prob. also the place for ὸ̔ ἐὰν ποιῆτε, ἐργάζεσθε ὡς τῷ κυρίῳ whatever you have to do, do it as work for the Lord Col 3:23. Cp. Eph 5:22. εἴ τις λαλεῖ ὡς λόγια θεοῦ if anyone preaches, (let the pers. do so) as if (engaged in proclaiming the) words of God 1 Pt 4:11a; cp. ibid. b; 2 Cor 2:17bc; Eph 6:5, 7.
    β. ὡς w. ptc. gives the reason for an action as one who, because (X., Cyr. 7, 5, 13 κατεγέλων τῆς πολιορκίας ὡς ἔχοντες τὰ ἐπιτήδεια; Appian, Liby. 56 §244 μέμφεσθαι τοῖς θεοῖς ὡς ἐπιβουλεύουσι=as being hostile; Polyaenus 2, 1, 1; 3, 10, 3 ὡς ἔχων=just as if he had; TestAbr B 8 p. 112, 17 [Stone p. 72] ὡς αὐτῷ ὄντι φίλῳ μου (do it for) him [Abraham] as a friend of mine; TestJob 17:5 καθʼ ἡμῶν ὡς τυραννούντων against us as though we were tyrants; ApcMos 23 ὡς νομίζοντες on the assumption that (we would not be discovered); Jos., Ant. 1, 251; Ath. 16, 1 ὁ δὲ κόσμος οὐχ ὡς δεομένου τοῦ θεοῦ γέγονεν; SIG 1168, 35); Paul says: I appealed to the Emperor οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν not that I had any charge to bring against my (own) people Ac 28:19 (PCairZen 44, 23 [257 B.C.] οὐχ ὡς μενῶν=not as if it were my purpose to remain there). ὡς foll. by the gen. abs. ὡς τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ δεδωρημένης because his divine power has granted us everything 2 Pt 1:3. Cp. Dg. 5:16.—Only in isolated instances does ὡς show causal force when used w. a finite verb for, seeing that (PLeid 16, 1, 20; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 17, 2, end, Vit. Auct. 25; Aesop, Fab. 109 P.=148 H.; 111 H-H.: ὡς εὐθέως ἐξελεύσομαι=because; Tetrast. Iamb. 1, 6, 3; Nicetas Eugen. 6, 131 H. Cp. Herodas 10, 3: ὡς=because [with the copula ‘is’ to be supplied]) Mt 6:12 (ὡς καί as Mk 7:37 v.l.; TestDan 3:1 v.l.; the parallel Lk 11:4 has γάρ). AcPlCor 1:6 ὡς οὖν ὁ κύριος ἠλέησεν ἡμᾶς inasmuch as the Lord has shown us mercy (by permitting us). So, more oft., καθώς (q.v. 3).
    γ. ὡς before the predicate acc. or nom. w. certain verbs functions pleonastically and further contributes to the aspect of perspective ὡς προφήτην ἔχουσιν τὸν Ἰωάννην Mt 21:26. Cp. Lk 16:1. λογίζεσθαί τινα ὡς foll. by acc. look upon someone as 1 Cor 4:1; 2 Cor 10:2 (for this pass. s. also c below). Cp. 2 Th 3:15ab; Phil 2:7; Js 2:9.
    w. focus on a conclusion existing only in someone’s imagination or based solely on someone’s assertion (PsSol 8:30; Jos., Bell. 3, 346; Just., A I, 27, 5; Mel., P. 58, 422) προσηνέγκατέ μοι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὡς ἀποστρέφοντα τὸν λαόν, καὶ ἰδοὺ … you have brought this fellow before me as one who (as you claim) is misleading the people, and nowLk 23:14. τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών; why do you boast, as though you (as you think) had not received? 1 Cor 4:7. Cp. Ac 3:12; 23:15, 20; 27:30. ὡς μὴ ἐρχομένου μου as though I were not coming (acc. to their mistaken idea) 1 Cor 4:18. ὡς μελλούσης τῆς πόλεως αἴρεσθαι assuming that the city was being destroyed AcPl Ha 5, 16.
    w. focus on what is objectively false or erroneous ἐπιστολὴ ὡς διʼ ἡμῶν a letter (falsely) alleged to be from us 2 Th 2:2a (Diod S 33, 5, 5 ἔπεμψαν ὡς παρὰ τῶν πρεσβευτῶν ἐπιστολήν they sent a letter which purported to come from the emissaries; Diog. L. 10:3 falsified ἐπιστολαὶ ὡς Ἐπικούρου; Just., A, II, 5, 5 ὡς ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ σπορᾷ γενομένους υἱούς). τοὺς λογιζομένους ἡμᾶς ὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας 2 Cor 10:2 (s. also aγ above). Cp. 11:17; 13:7. Israel wishes to become righteous οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως ἀλλʼ ὡς ἐξ ἔργων not through faith but through deeds (the latter way being objectively wrong) Ro 9:32 (Rdm.2 26f). ὡς ἐκ παραδόσεως ἀγράφου εἰς αὐτὸν ἥκοντα (other matters he recounts) as having reached him through unwritten tradition (Eus. about Papias) Papias (2:11).
    conj., marker of result in connection with indication of purpose=ὥστε so that (Trag., Hdt.+, though nearly always w. the inf.; so also POxy 1040, 11; PFlor 370, 10; Wsd 5:12; TestJob 39:7; ApcMos 38; Jos., Ant. 12, 229; Just., A I, 56, 2; Tat. 12, 2. W. the indic. X., Cyr. 5, 4, 11 οὕτω μοι ἐβοήθησας ὡς σέσῳσμαι; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 8, 7 p. 324, 25f; Jos., Bell. 3, 343; Ath. 15, 3; 22, 2) Hb 3:11; 4:3 (both Ps 94:11). ὡς αὐτὸν καθόλου τὸ φῶς μὴ βλέπειν Papias (3:2) (s. φῶς 1a). ὡς πάντας ἄχθεσθαι (s. ἄχθομαι) AcPl Ha 4, 14. ὡς πάντας … ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι 6, 31 al.
    marker of discourse content, that, the fact that after verbs of knowing, saying (even introducing direct discourse: Maximus Tyr. 5:4f), hearing, etc.=ὅτι that (X., An. 1, 3, 5; Menand., Sam. 590 S. [245 Kö.]; Aeneas Tact. 402; 1342; PTebt 10, 6 [119 B.C.]; 1 Km 13:11; EpArist; Philo, Op. M. 9; Jos., Ant. 7, 39; 9, 162; 15, 249 al.; Just., A I, 60, 2; Tat. 39, 2; 41, 1; Ath. 30, 4.—ORiemann, RevPhilol n.s. 6, 1882, 73–75; HKallenberg, RhM n.s. 68, 1913, 465–76; B-D-F §396) ἀναγινώσκειν Mk 12:26 v.l. (for πῶς); Lk 6:4 (w. πῶς as v.l.). μνησθῆναι Lk 24:6 (D ὅσα); cp. 22:61 (=Lat. quomodo, as in ms. c of the Old Itala; cp. Plautus, Poen. 3, 1, 54–56). ἐπίστασθαι (Jos., Ant. 7, 372) Ac 10:28; 20:18b v.l. (for πῶς). εἰδέναι (MAI 37, 1912, 183 [= Kl. T. 110, 81, 10] ἴστε ὡς [131/132 A.D.]) 1 Th 2:11a. μάρτυς ὡς Ro 1:9; Phil 1:8; 1 Th 2:10.—ὡς ὅτι s. ὅτι 5b.
    w. numerals, a degree that approximates a point on a scale of extent, about, approximately, nearly (Hdt., Thu. et al.; PAmh 72, 12; PTebt 381, 4 [VSchuman, ClW 28, ’34/35, 95f: pap]; Jos., Ant. 6, 95; Ruth 1:4; 1 Km 14:2; TestJob 31:2; JosAs 1:6) ὡς δισχίλιοι Mk 5:13. Cp. 8:9; Lk 1:56; 8:42; J 1:39; 4:6; 6:10, 19; 19:14, 39; 21:8; Ac 4:4; 5:7, 36; 13:18, 20; 27:37 v.l. (Hemer, Acts 149 n. 140); Rv 8:1.
    a relatively high point on a scale involving exclamation, how! (X., Cyr. 1, 3, 2 ὦ μῆτερ, ὡς καλός μοι ὁ πάππος! Himerius, Or. 54 [=Or. 15], 1 ὡς ἡδύ μοι τὸ θέατρον=how pleasant … ! Ps 8:2; 72:1; TestJob 7:12) ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων ἀγαθά Ro 10:15 (cp. Is 52:7). Cp. 11:33. ὡς μεγάλη μοι ἡ σήμερον ἡμέρα GJs 19:2.
    temporal conjunction (B-D-F §455, 2; 3; Harnack, SBBerlAk 1908, 392).
    w. the aor. when, after (Hom., Hdt. et al.; Diod S 14, 80, 1; pap [POxy 1489, 4 al.]; LXX; TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62]; JosAs 3:2; ParJer 3:1; ApcMos 22; Jos., Bell. 1, 445b; Just., D. 2, 4; 3, 1) ὡς ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι Lk 1:23. ὡς ἐγεύσατο ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος J 2:9.—Lk 1:41, 44; 2:15, 39; 4:25; 5:4; 7:12; 15:25; 19:5; 22:66; 23:26; J 4:1, 40; 6:12, 16; 7:10; 11:6, 20, 29, 32f; 18:6; 19:33; 21:9; Ac 5:24; 10:7, 25; 13:29; 14:5; 16:10, 15; 17:13; 18:5; 19:21; 21:1, 12; 22:25; 27:1, 27; 28:4. AcPl Ha 3, 20.
    w. pres. or impf. while, when, as long as (Menand., Fgm. 538, 2 K. ὡς ὁδοιπορεῖς; Cyrill. Scyth. [VI A.D.] ed. ESchwartz ’39 p. 143, 1; 207, 22 ὡς ἔτι εἰμί=as long as I live) ὡς ὑπάγεις μετὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου while you are going with your opponent Lk 12:58. ὡς ἐλάλει ἡμῖν, ὡς διήνοιγεν ἡμῖν τὰς γραφάς while he was talking, while he was opening the scriptures to us 24:32.—J 2:23; 8:7; 12:35f ( as long as; cp. ἕως 2a); Ac 1:10; 7:23; 9:23; 10:17; 13:25; 19:9; 21:27; 25:14; Gal 6:10 ( as long as); 2 Cl 8:1; 9:7; IRo 2:2; ISm 9:1 (all four as long as).—ὡς w. impf., and in the next clause the aor. ind. w. the same subject (Diod S 15, 45, 4 ὡς ἐθεώρουν …, συνεστήσαντο ‘when [or ‘as soon as’] they noticed …, they put together [a fleet]’; SIG 1169, 58 ὡς ἐνεκάθευδε, εἶδε ‘while he was sleeping [or ‘when he went to sleep’] [in the temple] he saw [a dream or vision]’) Mt 28:9 v.l.; J 20:11; Ac 8:36; 16:4; 22:11. Since (Soph., Oed. R. 115; Thu. 4, 90, 3) ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν Mk 9:21.
    ὡς ἄν or ὡς ἐάν w. subjunctive of the time of an event in the future when, as soon as.
    α. ὡς ἄν (Hyperid. 2, 43, 4; Herodas 5, 50; Lucian, Cronosolon 11; PHib 59, 1 [c. 245 B.C.] ὡς ἂν λάβῃς; UPZ 71, 18 [152 B.C.]; PTebt 26, 2. Cp. Witkowski 87; Gen 12:12; Josh 2:14; Is 8:21; Da 3:15 Theod.; Ath. 31, 3 [ἐάν Schwartz]) Ro 15:24; 1 Cor 11:34; Phil 2:23.
    β. ὡς ἐάν (PFay 111, 16 [95/96 A.D.] ὡς ἐὰν βλέπῃς) 1 Cl 12:5f; Hv 3, 8, 9; 3, 13, 2.
    w. the superlative ὡς τάχιστα (a bookish usage; s. B-D-F §244, 1; Rob. 669) as quickly as possible Ac 17:15 (s. ταχέως 1c).
    a final particle, expressing intention/purpose, with a view to, in order to
    w. subjunctive (Hom.+; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 33 [Stone p. 8]; SibOr 3, 130; Synes., Hymni 3, 44 [NTerzaghi ’39]) ὡς τελειώσω in order that I might finish Ac 20:24 v.l. (s. Mlt. 249).
    w. inf. (X.; Arrian [very oft.: ABoehner, De Arriani dicendi genere, diss. Erlangen 1885 p. 56]; PGen 28, 12 [II A.D.]; ZPE 8, ’71, 177: letter of M. Ant. 57, cp. 44–46; 3 Macc 1:2; Joseph.; cp. the use of the opt. Just., D. 2, 3) Lk 9:52. ὡς τελειῶσαι Ac 20:24. ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν Hb 7:9 (s. ἔπος).
    used w. prepositions to indicate the direction intended (Soph., Thu., X. [Kühner-G. I 472 note 1]; Polyb. 1, 29, 1; LRadermacher, Philol 60, 1901, 495f) πορεύεσθαι ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Ac 17:14 v.l.—WStählin, Symbolon, ’58, 99–104. S. also ὡσάν, ὡσαύτως, ὡσεί 2, ὥσπερ b, ὡσπερεί, ὥστε 2b. DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὡς

  • 8 καταρτίζω

    καταρτίζω fut. καταρτίσω; 1 aor. κατήρτισα, mid. κατηρτισάμην, 2 sg. κατηρτίσω. Pass.: aor. κατηρτίσθην LXX; pf. pass. κατήρτισμαι (ἀρτίζω, ‘get ready, prepare’, s. next entry; Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; TestSol 5:12 H).
    to cause to be in a condition to function well, put in order, restore.
    restore to a former condition, put to rights (since Hdt. 5, 28; 106; Dionys. Hal. 3, 10) τὶ someth. nets (by cleaning, mending, folding together) Mt 4:21; Mk 1:19 (cp. GWynne, Exp. 7th ser., 8, 1909, 282–85). Fig. κ. τινά restore someone ἐν πνεύματι πραΰτητος in a spirit of gentleness, i.e. in a gentle manner Gal 6:1. Pass. καταρτίζεσθε mend your ways 2 Cor 13:11.
    put into proper condition (cp. Epict. 3, 20, 10 of a trainer who adjusts parts of the body), adjust, complete, make complete τὶ someth. καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τ. πίστεως ὑμῶν to fix up any deficiencies in your faith or to complete what is lacking in your faith 1 Th 3:10. τινά someone: ὑμᾶς ἐν παντὶ ἀγαθῷ make you complete in every good thing Hb 13:21. κατηρτισμένοι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ νοὶ̈ καὶ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ γνώμῃ adjusted / made complete in the same mind and the same conviction 1 Cor 1:10. ἐν μιᾷ ὑποταγῇ IEph 2:2. ἐν ἀκινήτῳ πίστει ISm 1:1. Abs. 1 Pt 5:10. κατηρτισμένος (fully) trained, practiced (Polyb. 5, 2, 11 τ. εἰρεσίαις κατηρτισμένοι) κ. πᾶς (μαθητὴς) ἔσται ὡς ὁ διδάσκαλος αὐτοῦ when fully trained, the pupil will be like the teacher Lk 6:40. S. Betz, Gal. 297 n. 43.
    to prepare for a purpose, prepare, make, create, outfit.
    act. and pass., of God (w. ποιεῖν) B 16:6. (W. κτίζειν) τὰ πάντα Hm 1:1. Pass. ὁ κόσμος κατηρτίσθη Hv 2, 4, 1; also οἱ αἰῶνες (s. αἰών 3) ῥήματι θεοῦ Hb 11:3. κατηρτισμένος εἴς τι made, created for someth.: σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν vessels of wrath, designed for destruction Ro 9:22. ἄνθρωπος εἰς ἕνωσιν κατηρτισμένος a man set on (lit. made for) unity IPhld 8:1.
    mid. (PGM 4, 1147) καταρτίζεσθαί τί τινι prepare someth. for someone σῶμα Hb 10:5 (Ps 39:7 codd.: BSA). W. reflexive mng.: for oneself κατηρτίσω αἶνον you prepared praise for yourself Mt 21:16 (Ps 8:3).—DELG s.v. ἀραρίσκω. M-M. TW. Spicq.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καταρτίζω

  • 9 τελειόω

    τελειόω (τέλειος) fut. τελειώσω; 1 aor. ἐτελείωσα; perf. τετελείωκα. Pass.: pf. τετελείωμαι; 1 fut. τελειωθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐτελειώθην; pf. τετελείωμαι (Soph., Hdt.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 7 [Stone p. 38]; TestGad 7:1; EpArist, Philo; Jos., Vi. 12 al.; Ath., R. 17 p. 69, 10. The form τελεόω, freq. used outside our lit., occurs only Hb 10:1 v.l.—B-D-F §30, 2; Thackeray p. 82).
    to complete an activity, complete, bring to an end, finish, accomplish (Dionys. Hal. 3, 69, 2 τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τὰ πολλὰ εἰργάσατο, οὐ μὴν ἐτελείωσε τὸ ἔργον; Polyb. 8, 36, 2; 2 Ch 8:16; 2 Esdr 16: 3, 16) τὸ ἔργον J 4:34; 17:4; pl. 5:36. πάντα 1 Cl 33:6. ὡς τελειώσω τὸν δρόμον μου καὶ τὴν διακονίαν Ac 20:24. ἁγνῶς τελειοῦν τὴν διακονίαν complete service as deacon in holiness Hs 9, 26, 2. τὰς ἡμέρας spend all the days of the festival Lk 2:43 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 201). Pass. ἵνα τελειωθῇ ἡ γραφή in order that the scripture might receive its final fulfillment J 19:28 (perh. this belongs to 2c.)—τελειῶσαί τινα allow someone to reach the person’s goal (Hdt. 3, 86) pass. τῇ τρίτῃ τελειοῦμαι on the third day I will reach my goal Lk 13:32 (hardly mid., ‘bring to a close’ [Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 158] w. ‘my work’ to be supplied. But s. 2d below and cp. JDerrett, ZNW 75, ’84, 36–43 [wordplay involving death]).—This may also be the place for Hb 7:19 (s. 2eα below); 11:40 (s. 2d below).
    to overcome or supplant an imperfect state of things by one that is free fr. objection, bring to an end, bring to its goal/accomplishment
    of Jesus ἔπρεπεν αὐτῷ (i.e. τῷ θεῷ) διὰ παθημάτων τελειῶσαι (Ἰησοῦν) Hb 2:10 (i.e., as the context indicates, he receives highest honors via suffering and death in his identification w. humanity); pass., 5:9; 7:28. This is usu. understood to mean the completion and perfection of Jesus by the overcoming of earthly limitations (s. Windisch, Hdb. exc. on Hb 5:9.—JKögel, Der Begriff τελειοῦν im Hb: MKähler Festschr. 1905, 35–68; OMichel, D. Lehre von d. christl. Vollkommenheit nach d. Anschauung des Hb: StKr 106, ’35, 333–55; FTorm, Om τελειοῦν i Hb: Sv. Ex. Årsb. 5, ’40, 116–25; OMoe, TZ 5, ’49, 165ff). S. 3 below.
    bring to full measure, fill the measure of τὶ someth. τὰς ἀποκαλύψεις καὶ τὰ ὁράματα Hv 4, 1, 3. ἐτελείωσαν κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα GPt 5:17 (κατά A 2bγ).
    fulfill of prophecies, promises, etc., which arouse expectation of events or happenings that correspond to their wording (τελείωσις 2.—Jos., Ant. 15, 4 θεοῦ τοὺς λόγους τελειώσαντος; Artem. 4, 47 p. 228, 19 ἐλπίδας) ἡ πίστις πάντα ἐπαγγέλλεται, πάντα τελειοῖ Hm 9:10; pass. be fulfilled ἐξαίφνης τελειωθήσεται τὸ βούλημα αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 23:5.—MPol 16:2ab. The promises of the prophets find their fulfillment, by implication, in the gospel ISm 7:2. This may be the place for J 19:28 (so Bultmann.—S. 1 above).
    of the perfection of upright pers. who have gone on before, pass. (Wsd 4:13; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 74 ὅταν τελειωθῇς καὶ βραβείων καὶ στεφάνων ἀξιωθῇς) πνεύματα δικαίων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23. So perh. also 11:40 and Lk 13:32 (s. 1 above).
    α. someone ὁ νόμος οὐδέποτε δύναται τοὺς προσερχομένους τελειῶσαι Hb 10:1; likew. perh. (s. 1 above) 7:19 (then οὐδέν would refer to humanity). κατὰ συνείδησιν τελειῶσαι τὸν λατρεύοντα 9:9. Perh. 10:14 (s. 3 below). Pass. in act. sense become perfect (Zosimus: Hermet. IV p. 111, 15f) D 16:2; ἔν τινι in someth. (Jos., Ant. 16, 6) ἐν (τῇ) ἀγάπῃ 1J 4:18; 1 Cl 49:5; 50:3. W. inf. foll. B 6:19. ἵνα ὦσιν τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν in order that they might attain perfect unity J 17:23.—Also in an unfavorable sense τελειωθῆναι τοῖς ἁμαρτήμασιν B 14:5.—For Phil 3:12 s. 3 below.
    β. someth. The Lord is called upon, in the interest of his community τελειῶσαι αὐτὴν ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ σου D 10:5. Pass. (Philo, Somn. 1, 131 ψυχὴ τελειωθεῖσα ἐν ἄθλοις ἀρετῶν) ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη faith was perfected in good deeds Js 2:22. Of love 1J 2:5; 4:12, 17. Cp. 2 Cor 12:9 v.l.
    As a term of mystery religions consecrate, initiate, pass. be consecrated, become a τέλειος (s. τέλειος 3) Phil 3:12 (though mng. 2eα is also prob.). Some of the Hb-passages (s. 2a; eα above) may belong here, esp. those in which a consecration of Jesus is mentioned 2:10; 5:9; 7:28 (s. THaering, Monatschr. für Pastoraltheol. 17, 1921, 264–75. Against him ERiggenbach, NKZ 34, 1923, 184–95 and Haering once more, ibid. 386–89.—EKaesemann, D. wand. Gottesvolk ’39, 82–90; GAvdBerghvEysinga, De Brief aan de Hebreën en de oudchristelijke Gnosis: NThT 28, ’39, 301–30).—DELG s.v. τέλος. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > τελειόω

  • 10 παρά

    πᾰρά [pron. full] [ρᾰ], [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also [full] παραί: shortd. [full] πάρ, in Hom., Lyr. (but rarely in Trag., in lyr. passages, A.Supp. 553, S.Tr. 636), and in all dial ects exc. [dialect] Att., GDI5434.8 ([place name] Paros), IG5(2).3.14 (Tegea, iv B. C.), Inscr.Magn.26.28 (Thess.), etc.:—Prep. c. gen., dat., and acc., prop.
    A beside: hence,
    A WITH GEN. prop. denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:
    I of Place,

    πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν Il.13.744

    ;

    παρὰ ναῦφιν ἐλευσόμεθ' 12.225

    , etc.;

    παρ' Ὠκεανοῖο ῥοάων.. ἐπερχομένη Od.22.197

    ;

    πὰρ νηῶν ἀπώσεται Il.8.533

    , etc.;

    δῶρα π. νηὸς ἐνεικέμεν 19.194

    ;

    φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος π. μηροῦ 1.190

    , cf. 21.173;

    σπασσάμενος.. ἄορ παχέος π. μηροῦ 16.473

    ; πλευρὰ παρ' ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield, 4.468, cf. A.Th. 624.
    II commonly of Persons,
    1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc.,

    ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός Il.2.787

    ;

    παρ' Αἰήταο πλέουσα Od.12.70

    , etc.;

    ἀγγελίη ἥκει π. βασιλέος Hdt.8.140

    .

    ά; αὐτομολήσαντες π. βασιλέως X.An.1.7.13

    ;

    ἐξεληλυθὼς παρ' Ἀριστάρχου D.21.117

    ; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, X.Cyr.4.5.53; so

    οἱ π. τινός Th.7.10

    , Ev.Marc.3.21, etc.;

    ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν π. βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτόν X.An.1.1.5

    , etc.; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ' Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, Il.18.137, cf. 617, etc.;

    ἀπαγγέλλειν τι π. τινός X.An.2.1.20

    ;

    σὺ δὲ οἰμώζειν αὐτοῖς παρ' ἐμοῦ λέγε Luc.DMort.1.2

    .
    2 issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι π. τινός to be born from, Pl.Smp. 179b; λόγος (sc. ἐστί) π. Ἀθηναίων c. acc. et inf., Hdt.8.55: freq. following a Noun, δόξα ἡ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων glory from (given by) men, Pl.Phdr. 232a; ἡ π. τινὸς εὔνοια the favour from, i. e. of, any one, X.Mem.2.2.12; τὸ παρ' ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Id.Cyr.5.5.13; τὰ π. τινός all that issues from any one, as commands, commissions, Id.An.2.3.4, etc.; or promises, gifts, presents, Id.Mem.3.11.13; τὰ παρ' ἐμοῦ my opinions, Pl.Smp. 219a; παρ' ἑωυτοῦ διδούς giving from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt. 2.129, 8.5;

    παρ' ἑαυτοῦ προσετίθει X.HG6.1.3

    ; νόμον θὲς παρ' ἐμοῦ by my advice, Pl.Prt. 322d; αὐτοὶ παρ' αὑτῶν of themselves, Id.Tht. 150d, cf. Phdr. 235c.
    3 with Verbs of receiving, obtaining, and the like ,

    τυχεῖν τινος π. τινός Od.6.290

    , 15.158;

    πὰρ δ' ἄρα μιν Ταφίων πρίατο 14.452

    ;

    ἀρέομαι πὰρ μὲν Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χάριν Pi.P.1.76

    ;

    εὑρέσθαι τι π. τῶν θεῶν Isoc.9.14

    , cf. IG12.40.10; δέχεσθαι, λαμβάνειν, ἁρπάζειν π. τινός, Th.1.20, X.Oec.9.11, Hes.Th. 914; ἀντιάσαι, αἰτήσασθαι π. τινός, S.El. 870 (lyr.), X.HG3.1.4;

    ἀξιοῖ π. τοῦ ἰατροῦ φάρμακον πιὼν ἐξεμέσαι τὸ νόσημα Pl.R. 406d

    ;

    κόσμος τοῖς πράξασι γίγνεται π. τῶν ἀκουσάντων Id.Mx. 236e

    : without Verb,

    ὁ καρπὸς ὁ π. τῶν δημάρχων IG12.76.27

    : with Verbs of learning, etc.,

    μεμαθηκέναι π. τινῶν Hdt.2.104

    , etc.
    4 with [voice] Pass. Verbs,

    πὰρ Διὸς.. μῆνις ἐτύχθη Il.15.122

    ;

    π. θεῶν ἡ τοιαύτη μανία δίδοται Pl.Phdr. 245c

    , etc.; τὰ π. τῶν θεῶν σημαινόμενα, συμβουλευόμενα, X.Cyr.1.6.2; τὰ π. τινὸς λεγόμενα ib.6.1.42; τὰ π. τῆς τύχης δωρηθέντα the presents of.., Isoc.4.26;

    με π. σοῦ σοφίας πληρωθήσεσθαι Pl.Smp. 175e

    .
    III rarely for παρά c. dat., by, near,

    πὰρ ποδός Pi.P.10.62

    , 3.60; παρὰ δὲ κυανέων πελαγέων dub. l. in S.Ant. 966 (lyr.);

    τὸν Ῥειτὸν τὸν παρὰ τοῦ ἄστεως IG12.81.5

    ; πολλοὶ παρ' ἀμφοτέρων ἔπιπτον, = ἀμφοτέρωθεν, D.S.19.42.
    IV π. τῆς συγχωρήσεώς τινος without his consent, BCH46.337 ([place name] Teos).
    B WITH DAT. denoting rest by the side of any person or thing, answering the question where?
    I of Places, κατ' ἂρ ἕζετ'.. πὰρ πυρί, ἔκειτο π. σηκῷ, Od.7.154, 9.319;

    νέμονται π. πέτρῃ 13.408

    ;

    ἑσταότες παρ ὄχεσφιν Il.8.565

    ; πὰρ ποσὶ μαρναμένων ἐκυλίνδετο at their feet, 14.411, etc.; π. θύρῃσι at the door, 7.346;

    π. ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης 2.773

    ;

    δεῖπνον.. εἵλοντο παρ' ὄχθῃσιν ποταμοῖο Od.6.97

    , cf. Il.4.475, 20.53, etc.;

    κεῖσθαι παρ' Ἅιδῃ S.OT 972

    ; παρ' οἴνῳ over wine, ib. 780, etc.
    2 at one's house or place, with one,

    μένειν π. τισί 9.427

    ;

    θητευέμεν ἄλλῳ, ἀνδρὶ παρ' ἀκλήρῳ Od.11.490

    ;

    φιλέεσθαι π. τινί Il.13.627

    ; παρ' ἑωυτοῖσι at their own house, Hdt.1.105, cf. 86;

    παιδευθῆναι π. τινί X.Cyr.1.2.15

    ;

    καταλύειν π. τινί D.18.82

    (but

    παρά τινα καταλῦσαι Th.1.136

    ), etc.: hence οἱ παρ' ἐμοί those of my household, X.Mem.2.7.4, etc.; τὰ παρ' ἐμοί life with me, Id.An. 1.7.4; οἱ παρ' ἡμῖν ἄνθρωποι our people, Pl.Phd. 64b; ἡ παρ' ἡμῖν πολιτεία, ὁ παρ' ὑμῖν δῆμος, D.15.19; ὁ παρ' αὑτῷ βίοτος one's own life, S.OT 612;

    τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν πῦρ Pl.Phlb. 29f

    ;

    ὅσος παρ' ὑμῖν ὁ φθόνος φυλάσσεται S.OT 382

    ;

    τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν σῶμα Pl.Phlb. 29f

    ; also, in one's hands,

    τὰ π. τοῖς Ἑλληνοταμίαις ὄντα IG12.91.6

    ;

    ἔχειν παρ' ἑωυτῷ Hdt. 1.130

    , etc.; οὔπω παρ' ἐμοὶ τότ' ἦν λέγειν I had no right to speak then, Men.Epit.98.
    3 before, in the presence of,

    ἤειδε π. μνηστῆρσιν Od. 1.154

    ; before a judge,

    δίκας γίγνεσθαι π. τῷ πολεμάρχῳ IG12.16.9

    ;

    π. Δαρείῳ κριτῇ Hdt.3.160

    ;

    π. τῷ βασιλέϊ Id.4.65

    ;

    παρὰ δικασταῖς Th. 1.73

    ;

    εἰς κρίσιν καθιστάναι τινὰ π. τισί D.18.13

    : hence παρ' ἐμοί in my judgement, Hdt.1.32, cf. S.Tr. 589, E.Heracl. 881, 1 Ep.Cor.3.19; π. τούτῳ μέγα δυνήσεται with him, Pl.Grg. 510e.
    4 in quoting authors, παρ' Ἐφόρῳ, παρ' Αἰσχίνῃ, π. Θουκυδίδῃ, in Ephorus, etc., Plb. 9.2.4, D.H.Comp.9,18.
    III Arc., = π. c. gen., from,

    καθὰ εἶχον τὰς ἰντολὰς π. τᾷ ἰδίᾳ πόλι SIG559.9

    (Megalop., iii B. C.), cf. 558.10 (Ithaca, iii B. C.).
    C WITH ACCUS. in three main senses,
    I beside, near, by,
    II along,
    III past, beyond.
    I beside, near, by:
    1 with Verbs of coming, going, etc., to the side of, to,

    ἴτην π. νῆας Il.1.347

    , cf. 8.220, etc.;

    βῆ.. π. θῖνα 1.34

    , cf. 327, etc.; τρέψας πὰρ ποταμόν to the side of.., 21.603, cf. 3.187: more freq. of persons, εἶμι παρ' Ἥφαιστον to the chamber of H., 18.143, cf. Od.1.285, etc.;

    ἐσιόντες π. τοὺς φίλους Th.2.51

    , etc.;

    φοιτᾶν π. τὸν Σωκράτη Pl.Phd. 59d

    ; πέμπειν ἀγγέλους, πρέσβεις π. τινά, Hdt. 1.141, Th.1.58, etc.;

    ἄγειν π. τινά Hdt.1.86

    ;

    καταφυγὴ π. φίλων τινάς Th.2.17

    .
    2 with Verbs of rest, beside, near, by, sts. with ref. to past motion (expressed in such phrases as

    ἧσο παρ' αὐτὸν ἰοῦσα Il.3.406

    , cf. 11.577),

    ἔς ῥα θρόνους ἕζοντο παρ' Ἀτρεΐδην Μενέλαον Od.4.51

    , cf. 13.372; κεῖται ποταμοῖο παρ' ὄχθας lies stretched beside.., Il.4.487, cf. 12.381; παρ' ἔμ' ἵστασο come and stand by me, 11.314, cf. 592, 20.49, etc.;

    π. πυθμέν' ἐλαίης θῆκαν Od.13.122

    ;

    καταθέτω π. τὰ ἴκρια IG12.94.28

    ; κοιμήσαντο π. πρυμνήσια they lay down by.., Od.12.32, cf. 3.460;

    ὁ παρ' ἐμὲ καθήμενος Pl.Euthd. 271b

    , cf. Phd. 89b; ἐκάθητο π. τὴν πύλην, π. τὴν ὁδόν, LXX Ge.19.1, Ev.Marc. 10.46;

    παρ' αὐτὸν τὸν καλέσαντα κατακείμενος δειπνῆσαι Thphr.Char. 21.2

    , cf. Pl.Smp. 175c;

    ἐκαθέζετο π. τὸν Λύσιν Id.Ly. 211a

    , cf. R. 328c;

    στὰς παρ' αὐτόν Id.Phd. 116c

    ;

    τέμενος νεμόμεσθα.. παρ' ὄχθας Il.12.313

    , cf. 6.34, IG12.943.45;

    τοῦ Εὐρίπου, παρ' ὃν ᾤκει Aeschin.3.90

    ;

    κατελείφθη π. τὸν νηόν Hdt.4.87

    ;

    τὴν παρ' ἐμὲ ἐοῦσαν δύναμιν Id.8.140

    .ά (v.l. ἐμοί)

    ; εἶπεν αὐτῷ μένειν παρ' ἑαυτόν X.Cyr.1.4.18

    , cf. An.1.9.31, Ar.Fr. 451, Is.8.16, Alex.248, Demetr.Com. Nov.1.5, IG22.654.23 (iii B. C.), Plb.3.26.1, 11.14.3, 28.14.3;

    ἡ π. θάλασσαν Μακεδονία Th.2.99

    , cf. S.El. 184 (lyr.), Tr. 636 (lyr.);

    Καρβασυανδῆς π. Καῦνον IG12.204.52

    ;

    τὸ κουρεῖον τὸ π. τοὺς Ἑρμᾶς Lys.23.3

    , cf. And.1.62, Is.6.20, 8.35, Aeschin. 1.182, 3.88, Lycurg.112;

    τᾶς παστάδος τᾶς παρ' Ἀπόλλωνα IG42

    (1).109 iii 146 (Epid.); παρ' ὄμμα before one's eyes, E.Supp. 484; π. πόδας on the spot, Phld.Ir.p.78 W., Rh.2.2 S.; immediately thereafter, Plb.1.7.5, 1.8.2, al.
    b [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., and Thess., = supr. B. 11.2, at the house of.., with a person, IG7.3171.7 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.), GDI 1717 (Delph.); παρ' ἁμὲ πολυτίματος [ὁ σῖτος] Ar.Ach. 759 (Megar.);

    τοῖς κατοικέντεσσι πὰρ ἀμμέ IG9(2).517.18

    (Larissa, iii B. C.); τοῖ πὰρ ἀμμὲ πολιτεύματος ib.13;

    πεπολιτευκὼρ πὰρ ἁμέ Schwyzer 425.5

    (Elis, iii/ii B. C.): so in [dialect] Att., θέμενος π. γυναῖκας depositing with.., Pl. R. 465c.
    3 with Verbs of striking, wounding, etc.,

    βάλε στῆθος π. μαζόν Il.4.480

    , etc.;

    τὸν δ' ἕτερον.. κληῗδα παρ' ὦμον πλῆξε 5.146

    ;

    τύψε κατὰ κληῗδα παρ' αὐχένα 21.117

    , cf. 4.525, 8.325, etc.;

    αἰχμὴ δ' ἐξελύθη παρὰ νείατον ἀνθερεῶνα 5.293

    , cf. 17.310; δησάμενος τελαμῶνι π. σφυρόν ib. 290.
    4 with Verbs of placing, examining, etc., side by side with..,

    ὁ ἔλεγχος π. τὸν ἔλεγχον παραβαλλόμενος Pl.Grg. 475e

    , cf. Hp.Mi. 369c, Smp. 214c, R. 348a;

    ἐξέτασον παρ' ἄλληλα τὰ σοὶ κἀμοὶ βεβιωμένα D.18.265

    ;

    ἄλλα παρ' ἄλλατιθέμενα.. τῶν χρωμάτων Arist.Mete. 375a24

    .
    b Geom., παραβάλλειν π. apply an area to (i. e. along) a finite straight line, Euc.1.44, Archim.Aequil.2.1;

    π. τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτοῦ γραμμὴν παρατείναντα Pl. Men. 87a

    ; ἡ [εὐθεῖα] παρ' ἣν δύνανται αἱ καταγόμεναι τεταγμένως the line to which are applied the squares of the or dinates, etc., Apollon. Perg.Con.1.11: hence,
    c Arith., παραβάλλειν τι π. τι divide by.. (v.

    παραβάλλω A.

    VII. 2);

    μερίζω τι π. τι Dioph.4.33

    ; ἐπὶ γ π. ί multiply by 3 and divide by 10, PLond.5.1718.2 (vi A. D.).
    5 Geom., parallel to.., Democr.155, Arist. Top. 158b31, Archim.Sph. Cyl.1.12, al.
    6 metaph. in Gramm., like, as a parody of.., π. τὸ Σοφόκλειον, π. τὰ ἐν Τεύκρῳ Σοφοκλέους, Sch.Ar.Av. 1240, Nu. 584.
    b Gramm., of words which differ as compared with other words, π. τὸ τοῦ ἔρωτος ὄνομα σμικρὸν παρηγμένον ἐστίν.. [τὸ ἥρως] Pl.Cra. 398d, cf. 399a, Lg. 654a: hence, derived from.., π. τὸ ἔδαφος, δάπεδον, A.D. Pron.31.16; π. τὸ δρῶ δρᾶμα Sch.A.R.2.624;

    σύγκειται [τὸ αὐθέντης] π. τὸ εἷναι.. καὶ π. τὸ αὐτός Phryn.PSp.24

    B.
    7 generally, of Comparison, alongside of, compared with, usu. implying superiority,

    δοκέοντες π. ταῦτα οὐδ' ἂν τοὺς σοφωτάτους ἀνθρώπων Αἰγυπτίους οὐδὲν ἐπεξευρεῖν Hdt.2.160

    , cf. 7.20, 103;

    ἡλίου ἐκλείψεις αἳ πυκνότεραι π. τὰ ἐκ τοῦ πρὶν χρόνου μνημονευόμενα ξυνέβησαν Th.1.23

    , cf. 4.6;

    τῶν ἁπάντων ἀπερίοπτοί εἰσι π. τὸ νικᾶν Id.1.41

    ;

    π. τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ ἄνθρωποι βιοτεύουσι X.Mem.1.4.14

    ;

    φαίνεται π. τὸ ἀλγεινὸν ἡδὺ καὶ π. τὸ ἡδὺ ἀλγεινὸν ἡ ἡσυχία Pl.R. 584a

    , cf. Phdr. 236d, La. 183c, al.;

    εὐδαίμων μᾶλλον π. πάντας BCH26.332

    ([place name] Halae);

    προετέρει π. πάντας PSI 4.422.34

    (iii B. C.): sts. implying inferiority or defect, ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν βραχύ τι παρ' ἀγγέλους a little lower than the angels, LXX Ps. 8.6; μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ ὑστεροῦσι π. τὸν ἥλιον lag one day behind the sun, Gem.8.19; so perh. παρ' αὐτόν, ὑπὲρ αὐτόν (has passed the ball?) short of him, beyond him, Antiph.234; μέγα τοι ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη γνώμην ἐξ ὀργῆς μεταστῆσαι one day compared with another is important.., a day's delay makes a difference, Antipho 5.72; τί γὰρ παρ' ἦμαρ ἡμέρα τέρπειν ἔχει προσθεῖσα κἀναθεῖσα τοῦ γε κατθανεῖν; what joy has one day compared with another to offer, since it only brings us nearer to, or farther from, death (which is neither good nor evil)? S.Aj. 475; ὃς μὲν κρίνει (prefers) ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν, ὃς δὲ κρίνει (approves)

    πᾶσαν ἡμέραν Ep.Rom.14.5

    .
    8 with Verbs of estimating, to set at so and so much, hence π. = equivalent to.., ταρβῶ μὴ.. θῆται παρ' οὐδὲν τὰς ἐμὰς ἐπιστολάς set at nought, E.IT 732, cf. A. Ag. 229 (lyr.);

    παρ' οὐδὲν ἄγειν S.Ant.35

    ; π. μικρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι hold of small account, Isoc.5.79, D.61.51;

    παρ' ὀλίγον ποιεῖσθαί τινα X.An.6.6.11

    ; so with εἶναι, etc., παρ' οὐδέν ἐστι are as nothing, S.OT 983, cf. Ant. 466;

    παρ' οὐδὲν αὐταῖς ἦν ἂν ὀλλύναι πόσεις E.Or. 569

    ;

    οὐ π. μέγα ἔσεσθαι τὸ πταῖσμα Arr.An.1.18.6

    ; so perh. π. σμικρὰ κεχώρηκε have turned out of little account, have amounted to little, Hdt.1.120.
    b in Accountancy, without a verb, π. τὴν καταλλαγήν on account of κ., PHib.1.100.4 (iii B. C.).
    9 of correspondence, ὀφείλειν στατῆρα π. στατῆρα stater for stater (one to each of two creditors), BCH50.214 (Thasos, v B. C.);

    πληγὴν π. πληγὴν ἑκάτερον Ar.Ra. 643

    ; συνεῖναι ἑκατέρῳ ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν stayed day for day with each, D.59.46; hence of alternation, ποιεῖσθαι ἁγνείας καὶ θυσίας δύο π. δύο, of four priests acting two and two alternately, BGU1198.12 (i B. C.); τοῦ καθημερινοῦ ἢ μίαν π. μίαν (sc. ἡμέραν) [πυρετοῦ] quotidian or tertian fever, ib.956.3 (iii A. D.): sts. without doubling of the Noun, παρ' ἡμέρην, opp. καθ' ἡμέρην, tertian, opp. quotidian, Hp.Aph.1.12; καθ' ἡμέραν, παρ' ἡμέραν, π. δύο, π. τρεῖς every day, every second day, every third (fourth) day, Arr.Epict.2.18.13; π. μίαν every second day, Plb.3.110.4; παρ' ἐνιαυτόν every second year, Plu.Cleom.15; παρ' ἔτος year and year about, Arist.GA 757a7; every second year, Paus.8.15.2; π. μέρος by turns (v. μέρος II. 2);

    ὁ ἀνὰ μέρος παρ' ἓξ μῆνας ὑπὲρ γῆν τε καὶ ὑπὸ γῆν γινόμενος Ἄδωνις Corn. ND28

    ; π. μῆνα τρίτον every third month, Arist.HA 582b4, cf. Plu.2.942e; but π. τρία [ἔτεα] prob. every fourth year, IG5(2).422 ([place name] Phigalea), cf. Arr.Epict. l.c.; ἕνα παρ' ἕνα παραλειπτέον every second one, Nicom.Ar.1.18; ἕνα π. δύο ([etym.] τρεῖς) every third (fourth) one, ibid.; παρὰ δ' ἄλλαν ἄλλα μοῖρα διώκει now one now another, E.Heracl. 611.
    10 precisely at the moment of, παρ' αὐτὰ τἀδικήματα flagrante delicto, D.18.13, 21.26;

    ἀποδώσω π. τὸν εὔθυνον τὸ καθῆκον IG12.188.31

    ; π. τοιοῦτον καιρόν, π. τὰς χρείας, D.20.41,46; π. τὰ δεινά in the midst of danger, Plu.Ant.63;

    π. τὴν πρώτην γένεσιν Jul.Or.1.10b

    ; π. τὴν πρώτην (sc. ἐπίθεσιν) at the first attack, Hld.9.2;

    π. γε τὴν πρώτην ὁρμήν Ael.NA14.10

    .
    b distributively, whether of Time, π. τὰ ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα in each complete period of seventy years, Hdt.1.32;

    ἐν ταῖς ὁδοιπορίαις π. στάδια διακόσια.. τοῖς ἑκατὸν σταδίοις διήνεγκαν ἀλλήλων X.Oec.20.18

    ; πὰρ Ϝέτος each year, every year, Tab.Heracl. 1.101;

    π. τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ἕκαστον IG12(7).5.14

    ([place name] Amorgos); παρ' ἆμάρ τε καὶ νύκτα day and night, B.Fr.7; or more generally, πὰρ τὰν ἐλαίαν in respect of each olive plant, Tab.Heracl.1.122; παρ' ἡμέραν αἱ ἀμίαι πολὺ ἐπιδήλως αὐξάνονται from day to day, per day, Arist.HA 571a21;

    τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην βάσιν γινόμενον μικρὸν πολὺ γίνεται π. πολλάς Id.Pr. 881b26

    ;

    ἡ παρ' ἡμέραν χάρις D.8.70

    ;

    τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν ἡδύ Pl. Lg. 705a

    .
    c παρ' ἆμαρ on (this) day, to-day, τὸ μὲν πὰρ ἆμαρ, τὸ δέ .. to-day and to-morrow, Pi.P.11.63; but παρ' ἦμαρ to-morrow, S. OC 1455 (lyr.).
    d throughout a period of time,

    π. τὴν ζόην Hdt. 7.46

    ;

    π. τὸν βίον ἅπαντα Pl.Lg. 733a

    ;

    π. πάντα τὸν χρόνον D.18.10

    ; also more loosely, during, π. τὴν πόσιν while they were drinking, Hdt.2.121.

    δ; π. τὸν πότον Aeschin.2.156

    ;

    π. τὴν κύλικα Plu.Ant.24

    ; π. δεῖπνον or π. τὸ δεῖπνον, Id.2.737a,674f.
    II along,

    ὄνος παρ' ἄρουραν ἰών Il.11.558

    ;

    βῆ δὲ θέειν π. τεῖχος 12.352

    ;

    π. ῥόον Ὠκεανοῖο ᾔομεν Od. 11.21

    ;

    ἔπλεον π. τὴν ἤπειρον Hdt.7.193

    ;

    π. πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδόν Isoc.4.148

    ; ὀρθὴν παρ' οἶμον.. τύμβον κατόψει straight along the road, E.Alc. 835;

    παρ' ὅλην τὴν φάραγγα Plb.10.30.3

    ; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χαράδραν παραπορευομένων ib.9; for παραβάλλειν π., v. supr. c. 1.4b.
    2 strictly according to, without deviating from,

    εἶμι π. στάθμην ὀρθὴν ὁδόν Thgn. 945

    , cf. S.Fr.474.5; ὠμοί τε δούλοις πάντα καὶ π. στάθμην, i.e. too strict, A.Ag. 1045; π. τὸν λόγον ὃν ἀποφέρουσιν.. ἐπιδείξω I will prove to you strictly according to the accounts which they themselves submit, D.27.34.
    III past, beyond,

    παρὰ σκοπιὴν καὶ ἐρινεὸν ἠνεμόεντα.. ἐσσεύοντο Il.22.145

    , cf. Od.3.172, 24.12;

    βῆ δὲ π. Κρουνούς h.Ap. 425

    ; π. τὴν Βαβυλῶνα παριέναι pass by Babylon, X.Cyr.5.2.29; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χύτραν ἄκραν ὁρῶντες looking over the edge of.., Ar.Av. 390.
    2 metaph., over and above, in addition to,

    οὐκ ἔστι π. ταῦτ' ἄλλα Id.Nu. 698

    ;

    π. ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a

    , cf.R. 337d, D.18.139, X.HG 1.5.5; ἑκὼν ἐπόνει π. τοὺς ἄλλους more than the others, Id.Ages.5.3, cf. Mem.4.4.1, Oec.20.16;

    ἃ τῷ ῥαψῳδῷ προσήκει καὶ σκοπεῖσθαι καὶ διακρίνειν π. τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους Pl. Ion 539e

    .
    3 metaph., in excess over, πὰρ δύναμιν beyond one's strength, Il.13.787, cf. Th.1.70, Hyp.Lyc.16, Arist.Rh.Al. 1423b29;

    π. τὴν δ. Id.Po. 1451b38

    .
    4 metaph., in transgression or violation of,

    π. μοῖραν Od.14.509

    ;

    π. μοῖραν Δίος Alc.Supp. 14.10

    ; παρ' αἶσαν, παρὰ δίκαν, Pi.P.8.13, O.2.16, etc.;

    π. τὸ δίκαιον Th.5.90

    , etc.; π. τὰς σπονδάς, τὸν νόμον, Id.1.67, X.HG1.7.14;

    π. φύσιν Th.6.17

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 747b; π. τὴν στήλην prob. in IG12.45.20; π. καιρόν out of season, Pi.O.8.24, etc.; π. γνώμαν ib.12.10, cf. A.Supp. 454; π. δόξαν, π. τὸ δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, π. λόγον, Th.3.93, 1.84, Plb.2.38.5; παρ' ἐλπίδα or ἐλπίδας, A.Ag. 899, S.Ant. 392, etc.; πὰρ μέλος out of tune, Pi.N.7.69;

    π. τὴν ἀξίαν Th.7.77

    , etc.; π. τὸ εἰωθός, τὸ καθεστηκός, Id.4.17, 1.98.
    5 π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, = παρῆλθε τοσοῦτον κινδύνου, passed over so much ground within the sphere of danger, i.e. incurred such imminent peril, Id.3.49, cf. 7.2; in such phrases the tmesis was forgotten, and the acc. came to be governed by παρά, which thus came to mean 'by such and such a margin', ' with so much to spare', ἐνίκησαν π. πολύ, ἡσσηθέντες π. πολύ, Id.1.29, 2.89, cf. Pl. Ap. 36a; παρὰ δ' ὀλίγον ἀπέφυγες only just, E.IT 870 (lyr.);

    παρ' ὀλίγον ἢ διέφευγον ἢ ἀπώλλυντο Th.7.71

    ; δεινότατον π. πολύ by far, Ar.Pl. 445; παρ' ὅσον quatenus, Luc.Nec.17, etc.; π. δύο ψήφους ἀπέφυγε by two votes, Hyp.Eux.28, cf. D.23.205;

    π. τέτταρας ψήφους μετέσχε τῆς πόλεως Is.3.37

    ; π. τοσοῦτον ἐγένετο αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν by so much (= little) he missed falling in with.., Th.8.33; π. πέντε ναῦς πλέον ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ ἢ τρεῖς ὀβολοὶ ὡμολογήθησαν ib.29; οὐ π. μικρὸν ἐποίησαν they made no little difference, Isoc.4.59.
    b in phrases like π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, τοσοῦτον was sts. understood of the interval from danger, etc., and παρά came to mean 'by so much short of' (

    τὸ π. μικρὸν ὥσπερ οὐδὲν ἀπέχειν δοκεῖ Arist.Ph. 197a29

    ), within such and such a distance of, so near to, τὴν Ἠϊόνα π. νύκτα ἐγένετο (sc. αὐτῷ) λαβεῖν he was within one night of taking E., Th.4.106; π. μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν I came within a little of.., Isoc. 19.22, cf. Plb.1.43.7, Plu. Caes. 39; παρ' ἐλάχιστον ἦλθε.. ἀφελέσθαι was within an ace of taking away, Th.8.76; παρ' οὐδὲν μὲν ἦλθον ἀποκτεῖναι (were within a mere nothing, within an ace of killing him),

    ἐξεκήρυξαν δ' ἐκ πόλεως Aeschin. 3.258

    , cf. Plu.Pyrrh. 14, Alex.62; π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε διαφυγεῖν so near he came to escaping, Luc.Cat.4;

    παρὰ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Ὀλυμπιάδα Hdt.9.33

    ;

    παρ' οὐδὲν ἐλθόντες τοῦ ἀποβαλεῖν Plb.1.45.14

    , cf. 2.55.4, D.S.17.42: hence without ἐγένετο or ἐλθεῖν, π. μίαν μονάδα (less) by one, i.e. less one, Nicom.Ar.1.8; τεσσαράκοντα π. μίαν, = 39, 2 Ep.Cor.11.24; παρ' ἕνα τοσοῦτοι the same number less one, Plu. Publ.9; σύ μοι παρ' ἕνα ἥκεις ἄγων you have brought me one too few, Luc.Cat.4;

    δύναται π. δύο συλλαβὰς εἶναι τὸ καταληκτόν Heph.4.2

    ; τὰ ὁλοκόττινα ηὑρέθησαν π. ἑπτὰ κεράτια seven carats short, PMasp.70.2 (vi A. D.); πάντες παρ' ἕνα, πάντες παρ' ὀλίγους, all save one (a few), Plu.Cat.Mi.20, Ant.5;

    ἔτη δύο π. ἡμέρας δύο IG5(1).801

    ([place name] Laconia); of one Μάρκος, θηρίον εἶ π. γράμμα you are a bear ([etym.] ἄρκος) all but a letter, AP11.231 (Ammian.); ὡς π. τι καὶ τὰς ὄψεις ἀφανίσαι so that he all but (lit. less something) lost his sight, Vett.Val.228.6; π. τι βυθίζεσθαι v.l. in Ev.Luc.5.7; τὸ π. τοῦτο the figure less that, i.e. the remainder or difference, PTeb.99.10 (ii B. C.), cf. POxy.264.4 (i A. D.), PAmh.2.148.5 (v A. D.); hence of any difference whether of excess or defect, οὐδὲν π. τοῦτο ποιούμενοι τοὺς.. Λευκανούς τε καὶ τοὺς.. Σαυνίτας making no difference between.., Str.6.1.3, cf. 14.5.11, Plu.2.24c.
    6 hence of the margin by which anything increases or decreases, and so of the cause according to which anything comes into existence or varies,

    τὸ εὖ π. μικρὸν διὰ πολλῶν ἀριθμῶν γίνεται Polyclit.2

    (cf. μικρός III. 5 c); διαφέρει π. τὰς τῶν παθημάτων ἐναντιώσεις according to.., Arist.HA 486b5;

    μεταπίπτει π. τὰ κλίματα Gem. 5.29

    , cf. 11.5, al.; π. τὰ πράγματα cj. in Apollod.Car.11.
    7 more generally of the margin by which an event occurs, i.e. of the necessary and sufficient cause or motive (

    τὸ μὴ π. τοῦτο γίνεσθαι τότε λέγομεν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τούτου μηδὲν ἧττον περαίνηται ὁ συλλογισμός Arist.APr. 65b6

    , cf. 48a24, al.), κεινὰν π. δίαιταν just for the sake of unsatisfying food, Pi.O.2.65; ἕκαστος οὐ π. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν οἴεται βλάψειν each thinks that his own negligence will not suffice to cause injury, Th.1.141, cf. Isoc.3.48; π. τὴν αὑτοῦ ἁμαρτίαν all through his own fault, Antipho 3.4.5, cf. Isoc.6.52, D.4.11, 18.232; πολλὰ.. ἐστιν αἴτια τούτων, καὶ οὐ παρ' ἓν οὐδὲ δύ' εἰς τοῦτο τὰ πράγματ' ἀφῖκται not from one or two causes only, Id.9.2; οὐ π. τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι it does not follow that it is not.., 1 Ep.Cor.12.15; π. τὸ τὴν ἀρίθμησιν ποιήσασθαι ἐξ ἑτοίμου τοὺς ἐργώνας οὐκ ὀλίγα χρήματα περιεποίησε τῇ πόλει by the simple fact of prompt payment, IPE12.32B35 (Olbia, iii B. C.);

    οὐδὲν ἂν παρ' ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο τούτων Lycurg.63

    , cf. Plb.3.103.2, 18.28.6, al.; οὐδεὶς παρ' ἑαυτόν ἐστι βασιλεύς thanks to himself alone, Aristeas 224;

    παρ' αὑτὸν ἀτυχεῖ Arr.Epict.3.24.2

    , cf. Phld.Rh.2.16 S.;

    παρ' ἡμᾶς ἡ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀπόστασις Hierocl. in CA25p.477M.

    ; εἶναι π. τοῦτο σωτηρίαν τε πόλει καὶ τοὐναντίον, i.e. on this depends.., Pl.Lg. 715d, cf. X.Eq.Mag.1.5, D.C.Fr.36.5;

    π. μίαν ἡμέραν καὶ ἓν πρᾶγμα καὶ ἀπόλλυται προκοπὴ καὶ σῴζεται Epict.Ench.51.2

    ; π. τὸ Ἕλληνά με εἶναι just because I am a Greek, UPZ7.13 (ii B. C.);

    π. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν αὐτήν LXX Ge.29.20

    , cf. Ex.14.11; later more loosely, because of.., Phld.Rh.1.158 S., Gem.6.24, etc.; οὐδὲν π. σὲ γέγονε it is no fault of yours, PRyl.243.6 (ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1420.7 (ii A. D.).
    8 of a limit of possibility,

    εἴπερ ἐνεδέχετο π. τοὺς παρόντας καιρούς D.18.239

    ; πεῖσαι τό γε παρ' αὑτόν to persuade (the judges) so far as in you lies, Arr.Epict.2.2.20; οἴμωζε παρ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, for all I care, Ar.Av. 846.
    D POSITION: παρά may follow its Subst. in all three cases, but then becomes by anastrophe πάρα: when the ult. is elided, the practice varies,

    τῇσι παρ' Il.18.400

    ; but Ἡφαίστοιο πάρ' ib. 191.
    E παρά abs., as ADV., near, together, Il.1.611, al., E.IA 201 (lyr.).
    F πάρα (with anastrophe) stands for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, Il.1.174, Hes.Op. 454, A.Pers. 167, Hdt.1.42, al., S.El. 285, Ar.Ach. 862, etc.
    I alongside of, beside, of rest, παράκειμαι, παράλληλοι, παρέζομαι, πάρειμι (εἰμί), παρίστημι; of motion, παραπλέω, πάρειμι ([etym.] εἶμι).
    II to the side of, to, παραδίδωμι, παρέχω.
    III to one side of, by, past, παρέρχομαι, παροίχομαι, παραπέμπω, παρακμάζω, παρατρέχω.
    IV metaph.,
    1 aside or beyond, i.e. amiss, wrong, παραβαίνω, παράγω, παροράω, παρορκέω, παρακούω, παραγιγνώσκω.
    2 of comparison, as in παραβάλλω, παρατίθημι.
    3 of alteration or change, as in παραλλάσσω, παραπείθω, παραπλάσσω, παρατεκταίνω, παραυδάω, παράφημι.
    4 of a side-issue, παραπόλλυμι. (Cogn. with Goth. faúr 'along', Lat. por-.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > παρά

  • 11 ἐπιτελέω

    ἐπιτελέω fut. ἐπιτελέσω; 1 aor. ἐπετέλεσα. Pass.: 1 fut. ἐπιτελεσθήσομαι LXX; aor. ἐπετελέσθην (Hdt.+; freq. in civic decrees).
    to finish someth. begun, end, bring to an end, finish (1 Km 3:12; 1 Esdr 4:55; 6:27) τὶ someth. Ro 15:28; Phil 1:6; 2 Cor 8:6, 11a. Abs. vs. 11b. So also Gal 3:3, either as mid.: you have begun in the Spirit; will you now end in the flesh? or, less prob., as pass. will you be made complete in the flesh? w. ref. to the Judaizers.
    to bring about a result according to plan or objective, complete, accomplish, perform, bring about (IMagnMai 17, 25) τὶ someth. πάντα (1 Esdr 8:16) 1 Cl 1:3; 2:8; 48:4. πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν 33:1 (POslo 137, 9 [III A.D.] ἐ. τὰ καθήκοντα ἔργα). τὰ ἀνήκοντα τῇ βουλήσει 35:5 (PTebt 294, 11 τὰ τῇ προφητείᾳ προσήκοντα ἐπιτελεῖν). τά διατασσόμενα carry out the commands or instructions (PGM 4, 1539f τ. ἐντολάς) 37:2f; cp. 40:1f. τ. λειτουργίαν perform a service (Philo, Somn. 1, 214; s. below for this t.t., frequently used in recognition of civic-minded pers., and s. lit. s.v. λειτουργέω 2) 1 Cl 20:10; Lk 13:32 v.l. τὰς θεραπείας GJs 20:2 (not pap). τὰ κυνήγια the animal-combat AcPl Ha 3, 4. ἁγιωσύνην bring about sanctification 2 Cor 7:1 (cp. EpArist 133 κακίαν; 166 ἀκαθαρσίαν). τὴν σκηνήν erect the tent, i.e. carry out specifications for construction of a tent Hb 8:5 (s. Ex. 26). Esp. of the performance of rituals and ceremonies (Hdt. et al.; SIG 1109, 111 ἐ. τὰς λιτουργίας; UPZ 43, 20 [162/161 B.C.]; 106, 21 [99 B.C.]; PTebt 292, 20f; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 70, 9–11; EpArist 186; Philo, Ebr. 129; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 118) τ. λατρείας ἐ. perform the rituals (Philo, Somn. 1, 214) Hb 9:6. θυσίας bring sacrifices (Hdt. 2, 63; 4, 26; Diod S 17, 115, 6; Herodian 1, 5, 2; SIG index; IPriene 108, 27; JosAs 2:5; Philo, Somn. 1, 215; Jos., Ant. 4, 123; 9, 273; POxy 2782, 6–8 [II/III A.D.]) Dg 3:5. The pass. (IMagnMai 17, 25f) in this sense 1 Cl 40:3. τὴν ἡμέραν γενέθλιον ἐ. celebrate the birthday MPol 18:2 (Epici p. 39, 19f B.=p. 18, 3 K. γάμους ἐπετέλεσεν; Ammonius, Vi. Aristot. p. 11, 23 Westerm. ἑορτὴν ἐ.).—Mid. (=act., as Polyb. 1, 40, 16; 2, 58, 10; Diod S 3, 57, 4 πρᾶξιν ἐπιτελέσασθαι) γυναῖκες ἐπετελέσαντο ἀνδρεῖα women have performed heroic deeds 1 Cl 55:3.
    to cause someth. to happen as fulfillment of an objective or purpose, fulfill (PsSol 6:6 πᾶν αἴτημα; Lucian, Charon 6 τ. ὑπόσχεσιν) of a saying of scripture, pass. 1 Cl 3:1. Apparently in ref. to divine purpose lay someth. upon someone, accomplish someth. in the case of someone τινί τι (Pla., Leg. 10, 910d δίκην τινί) pass. τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων τῇ ἀδελφότητι ἐπιτελεῖσθαι the same kinds of sufferings are laid upon the fellowship or are accomplished in the case of the fellowship 1 Pt 5:9.—DELG s.v. τέλο. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπιτελέω

  • 12 πολύς

    πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, οῦ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) ‘much’.—Comparative πλείων, πλεῖον (18 times in the NT, 4 times in the Apost. Fathers [including Hv 3, 6, 4; Hs 8, 1, 16] and Ath. 12, 3) or πλέον (Lk 3:13 and Ac 15:28 μηδὲν πλέον; otherwise, πλέον in the NT only J 21:15; 14 times in the Apost. Fathers [incl. μηδὲν πλέον Hs 1, 1, 6]; Ar. twice; Just. 6 times; Tat. once; Ath. 7 times), ονος; pl. πλείονες, and acc. πλείονας contracted πλείους, neut. πλείονα and πλείω (the latter Mt 26:53 [πλεῖον, πλείου vv.ll.]; B-D-F §30, 2; Mlt-H. 82; Thackeray p. 81f; Mayser p. 68f) ‘more’ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27=Stone p. 70 [πλείον]; TestJob 35:2; TestGad 7:2 [πλεῖον]; AscIs 3:8; [πλέον]; EpArist; apolog. exc. Mel.).—Superlative πλεῖστος, η, ον ‘most’ (Hom.+).
    pert. to being a large number, many, a great number of
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj., preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun) in the pl. many, numerous δυνάμεις πολλαί many mighty deeds Mt 7:22b. δαιμονιζόμενοι πολλοί 8:16. Cp. vs. 30; 9:10; 13:17; 24:11; 27:52, 55; Mk 2:15a; 6:13; 12:41; Lk 4:25, 27; 7:21b; 10:24; J 10:32; 14:2; Ac 1:3; 2:43; 8:7b; 14:22; Ro 4:17f (Gen 17:5); 8:29; 12:4; 1 Cor 8:5ab; 11:30; 12:12a, 20; 1 Ti 6:12; 2 Ti 2:2; Hb 2:10; 1J 4:1; 2J 7; Rv 5:11; 9:9; 10:11; 1 Cl 55:3ab. ἔτη πολλά many years: Lk 12:19b (εἰς ἔτη π.); Ac 24:10 (ἐκ π. ἐτῶν); Ro 15:23 (ἀπὸ π. [v.l. ἱκανῶν] ἐτῶν).—αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί Lk 7:47a. αἱ εὐεργεσίαι αἱ π. 1 Cl 21:1.—πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα many serious charges Ac 25:7 (cp. Ps.-Pla., Sisyph. 1, 387a πολλά τε καὶ καλὰ πράγματα; B-D-F §442, 11; Rob. 655). πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα J 20:30 (on the form X., Hell. 5, 4, 1 πολλὰ μὲν οὖν … καὶ ἄλλα λέγειν καὶ Ἑλληνικὰ καὶ βαρβαρικά; Dionys. Hal. 2, 67, 5; Ps.-Demetr. 142 πολλὰς κ. ἄλλας χάριτας; Jos., Ant. 3, 318; Tat. 38, 1. On the subject-matter Bultmann 540, 3; also Porphyr., Vi. Pyth. 28 after a miracle-story: μυρία δʼ ἕτερα θαυμαστότερα κ. θειότερα περὶ τἀνδρὸς … εἴρηται κτλ.).—ἄλλοι πολλοί many others IRo 10:1. ἄλλαι πολλαί Mk 15:41. ἄλλα πολλά (Jos., Bell. 6, 169, Ant. 9, 242; Just., D. 8, 1) J 21:25. ἕτεροι πολλοί Ac 15:35. ἕτερα πολλά (Jos., Vi. 39) Lk 22:65.—Predicative: πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐισερχόμενοι Mt 7:13.—Mk 5:9; 6:31; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). AcPl Ha 5, 16.—οὐ πολλοί not many=( only) a few οὐ πολλαὶ ἡμέραι (Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13; J 2:12; Ac 1:5; AcPl Ha 11, 1. οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοί not many wise (people) 1 Cor 1:26a; cp. bc. οὐ πολλοί πατέρες not many fathers 4:15.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. persons—without the art. Mt 7:22; 8:11; 12:15; 20:28; 24:5ab; 26:28; Mk 2:2; 3:10 (Mt 12:15 has ascensive πάντας; other passages to be compared in this connection are Mk 10:45=Mt 20:28 πολλῶν and 1 Ti 2:6 πάντων. Cp. the double tradition of the saying of Bias in Clem. of Alex., Strom. 1, 61, 3 πάντες ἄνθρωποι κακοὶ ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τ. ἀνθρώπων κακοί.—On Mk 10:45 s. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 471–73); 6:2; 11:8; Lk 1:1 (cp. Herm. Wr. 11, 1, 1b and see JBauer, NovT 4, ’60, 263–66), 14; J 2:23; 8:30; Ac 9:42; Ro 16:2; 2 Cor 11:18; Gal 3:16 (πολλοί= a plurality); Tit 1:10; Hb 12:15; 2 Pt 2:2. AcPl Ha 5, 8; 7, 5; 11, 3. Opp. ὀλίγοι Mt 22:14; 20:16 v.l. (cp. Pla., Phd. 69c ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί, βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι=the thyrsus-bearers [officials] are many, but the truly inspired are few)—W. a partitive gen. πολλοὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων Mt 3:7. π. πῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:16.—J 4:39; 12:11; Ac 4:4; 8:7a; 13:43; 18:8; 19:18; 2 Cor 12:21; Rv 8:11.—W. ἐκ and gen. (AscIs 3:1; Jos., Ant. 11, 151) πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν J 6:60, 66.—10:20; 11:19, 45; 12:42; Ac 17:12. ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου πολλοί J 7:31 (Appian, Iber. 78 §337 πολλοὶ ἐκ τοῦ πλήθους).
    ב. πολλά—many things, much without the art.: γράφειν write at length B 4:9. διδάσκειν Mk 4:2; 6:34b. λαλεῖν Mt 13:3. μηχανᾶσθαι MPol 3. πάσχειν (Pind., O. 13, 63 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 268; 403) Mt 16:21; Mk 5:26a; 9:12; Lk 9:22; 17:25; B 7:11; AcPl Ha 8, 19. ποιεῖν Mk 6:20 v.l. United w. another neut. by καί (Lucian, Icar. 20 πολλὰ κ. δεινά; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 345 D.: πολλὰ κ. καλά; Ps.-Demetr., El. 70 πολλὰ κ. ἄλλα; likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §53; Arrian, Anab. 6, 11, 2) πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα many other things Lk 3:18. πολλὰ ἂν κ. ἄλλα εἰπεῖν ἔχοιμι Dg 2:10 (Eur., Ep. 3, 2, πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα εἰπεῖν ἔχω; Diod S 17, 38, 3 πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα … διαλεχθείς). ἐν πολλοῖς in many ways (Diod S 26, 1, 2; OGI 737, 7 [II B.C.]; Just., D. 124, 4 [of line of proof]) 2 Cor 8:22a. ἐπὶ πολλῶν (opp. ἐπὶ ὀλίγα) over many things Mt 25:21, 23.—W. art. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) τὰ πολλὰ πράσσειν transact a great deal of business Hs 4:5b.
    γ. elliptical δαρήσεται πολλά (sc. πληγάς) will receive many (lashes) Lk 12:47 (B-D-F §154; 241, 6).
    comparative πλείων, πλεῖον
    α. adj. w. a plural (Diod S 14, 6, 1 μισθοφόρους πλείους=many mercenaries) πλείονας πόνους (opp. οὐχ ἕνα οὐδὲ δύο) 1 Cl 5:4. ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους for a (large) number of days, for many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277; cp. Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 29 πλείονας ἡμ.) Ac 13:31.—21:10 (Jos., Ant. 16, 15); 24:17; 25:14; 27:20. οἱ μὲν πλείονές εἰσιν γεγονότες ἱερεῖς the priests of former times existed in greater numbers Hb 7:23. ἑτέροις λόγοις πλείοσιν in many more words (than have been reported) Ac 2:40. ταῦτα καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα MPol 12:1.—W. a gen. of comparison (Just., A I 53, 3; Tat. 3, 2) ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων other slaves, more than (he had sent) at first Mt 21:36. πλείονα σημεῖα ὧν more signs than those which J 7:31. Also w. ἤ: πλείονας μαθητὰς ἤ more disciples than 4:1. After πλείονες (-α) before numerals the word for ‘than’ is omitted (B-D-F §185, 4; Kühner-G. II 311; Rob. 666; Jos., Ant. 14, 96) ἐτῶν ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος the man was more than 40 years old Ac 4:22. πλείους τεσσεράκοντα 23:13, 21. Cp. 24:11; 25:6 (Jos., Ant. 6, 306 δέκα οὐ πλείους ἡμέρας).—The ref. is to relative extent (cp. 2bα) in τὰ ἔργα σου τὰ ἕσχατα πλείονα τῶν πρώτων your deeds, the latter of which are greater than the former Rv 2:19.
    β. subst.
    א. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους the majority, most (Diog. L. 1, 20; 22; Jos., Ant. 10, 114) Ac 19:32; 27:12. W. ἐξ: ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες most of whom 1 Cor 15:6. W. gen. and a neg. (litotes) οὐκ ἐν τ. πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ θεός God was pleased with only a few of them 10:5. This is perh. (s. ג below) the place for 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6; 9:2. Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ב. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους (even) more πλείονες in even greater numbers Ac 28:23. πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν many more came to believe J 4:41.—διὰ τῶν πλειόνων to more and more people=those who are still to be won for Christ 2 Cor 4:15.
    ג. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους. In contrast to a minority οἱ πλείονες can gain the sense the others, the rest (so τὰ πλείονα Soph., Oed. Col. 36; τὸ πλέον Thu. 4, 30, 4; Jos., Ant. 12, 240; B-D-F §244, 3). So perh. (s. א above) ἵνα τ. πλείονας κερδήσω (opp. the apostle himself) 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6 (opp. the one who has been punished too severely.—In this case [s. א above] his punishment would have been determined by a unanimous vote of the Christian assembly rather than by a majority). Cp. 9:2; Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ד. πλείονα (for πλεῖον) more Mt 20:10 v.l.; various things Lk 11:53. ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα 1 Cl 24:5 (s. as adv. ParJer 7:26).
    superl. adj. πλείστη w. a plural most of αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις Mt 11:20 (difft. B-D-F §245, 1).
    pert. to being relatively large in quantity or measure, much, extensive
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj. preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun)
    א. in the sg. much, large, great πολὺς ἀριθμός Ac 11:21. W. words that in themselves denote a plurality (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 80 §338 στρατὸς πολύς) πολὺς ὄχλος (s. ὄχ. 1a) Mt 14:14; 20:29; 26:47; Mk 5:21, 24; 6:34a; 8:1; 9:14; 12:37 (ὁ π. ὄχ.); Lk 5:29; 6:17a; 8:4; J 6:2, 5 (for the expression ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, in which π. follows the noun, J 12:9, 12, cp. Arrian, Anab. 1, 9, 6 ὁ φόνος πολύς); Ac 6:7; Rv 7:9; 19:1, 6. πολὺ πλῆθος (s. pl. 2bα) Mk 3:7f; Lk 5:6; 6:17b; 23:27; Ac 14:1; 17:4; 1 Cl 6:1. λαὸς πολύς many people Ac 18:10. Of money and its value, also used in imagery μισθὸς πολύς Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, 35 (all three predicative, as Gen 15:1). ἐργασία π. Ac 16:16. π. κεφάλαιον 22:28. χρυσοῦ πολλοῦ … τρυφῆς πολλῆς AcPl Ha 2, 19.—Of things that occur in the mass or in large quantities (Diod S 3, 50, 1 πολλὴ ἄμπελος) γῆ πολλή Mt 13:5; Mk 4:5; θερισμὸς π. Mt 9:37; Lk 10:2 (both pred.). χόρτος π. J 6:10; καρπὸς π. (Cyranides p. 121, 11) 12:24; 15:5, 8.—λόγος π. a long speech (Diod S 13, 1, 2; Just., D. 123, 7) Ac 15:32; 20:2. περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11 (cp. Pla., Phd. 115d).—Of time: πολὺς χρόνος a long time (Hom. et al.; Demetr.(?): 722 Fgm. 7; Jos., Ant. 8, 342; 19, 28; Just., A II, 2, 11) J 5:6 (s. ἔχω 7b); Hs 6, 4, 4 (pred.). μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον (Jos., Ant. 12, 324) Mt 25:19. Differently Mk 6:35ab (s. 3aα).
    ב. adj. w. a noun in the pl. many, large, great, extensive, plentiful ὄχλοι πολλοί great crowds or probably better many people (as Diod S 20, 59, 2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 3. For the corresponding mng. of ὄχλοι s. ὄχλος 1a) Mt 4:25; 8:1; 13:2; 15:30a; 19:2; Lk 5:15; 14:25. κτήματα πολλά a great deal of property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22 (cp. Da 11:28 χρήματα π.). ὕδατα πολλά much water, many waters (Maximus Tyr. 21, 3g of the Nile ὁ πολὺς ποταμός, likew. Procop. Soph., Ep. 111) J 3:23; Rv 1:15; 14:2; 17:1; 19:6b. θυμιάματα πολλά a great deal of incense 8:3. τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα Ac 26:24. πολλοὶ χρόνοι long periods of time (Plut., Thes. 6, 9). πολλοῖς χρόνοις for long periods of time (SIG 836, 6; pap) Lk 8:29; 1 Cl 44:3. χρόνοις πολλοῖς AcPlCor 2:10. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων (Diod S 3, 47, 8; Jos., Ant. 14, 110; 17, 204) 1 Cl 42:5.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. pers.—w. the art. οἱ πολλοί the many, of whatever appears in the context Mk 6:2 v.l. (the many people who were present in the synagogue); 9:26b (the whole crowd). Opp. ὁ εἷς Ro 5:15ac, 19ab; the many who form the ἓν σῶμα the one body 12:5; 1 Cor 10:17. Paul pays attention to the interests of the many rather than to his own vs. 33 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 212).—The majority, most (X., An. 5, 6, 19; Appian, Maced. 7, Bell. Civ. 4, 73 §309; 2 Macc 1:36; En 104:10; AscIs 3:26; Jos., Ant. 17, 72; Just., D. 4, 3) Mt 24:12; Hb 12:15 v.l. W. a connotation of disapproval most people, the crowd (Socrat., Ep. 6, 2; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 8; Epict. 1, 3, 4; 2, 1, 22 al.; Plut., Mor. 33a; 470b; Plotinus, Enn. 2, 9, 9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 42) 2 Cor 2:17; Pol 2:1; 7:2.—Jeremias, The Eucharistic Words of Jesus3, tr. NPerrin, ’66, 179–82; 226–31, and TW VI 536–45: πολλοί.
    ב. πολύ much ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολὺ κτλ. Lk 12:48 (Just., A I, 17, 4 twice πλέον). Cp. 16:10ab; 2 Cl 8:5; καρποφορεῖν π. bear much fruit Hs 2:3. πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον much in every way Ro 3:2 (Ael. Aristid. 34, 43 K.=50 p. 562 D. gives answer to a sim. quest. asked by himself: πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα).—Js 5:16.—As gen. of price πολλοῦ for a large sum of money (Menand., Fgm. 197 Kö.; PRyl 244, 10. S. στρουθίον.) Mt 26:9.—Of time: ἐπὶ πολύ ( for) a long time (JosAs 19:3; Ar. 65, 3; s. also ἐπί 18cβ) Ac 28:6; AcPl Ha 10, 21. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon afterward Ac 27:14 (μετά B 2c).—ἐπὶ πολύ more than once, often (Is 55:7) Hm 4, 1, 8.—Before a comp. (as Hom. et al.; B-D-F §246; Rob. 664) in the acc. πολὺ βέλτιον much better Hs 1:9. π. ἐλάττων v 3, 7, 6 (Ar. 6, 2). π. μᾶλλον much more, to a much greater degree (Dio Chrys. 2, 10; 17; 64 al.; Ael. Aristid. 34, 9 K.=50 p. 549 D.; Just., A II, 8, 3; D. 95, 1 al.) Hb 12:9, 25 (by means of a negative it acquires the mng. much less; cp. Diod S 7, 14, 6 πολὺ μᾶλλον μὴ … =even much less); Dg 2:7b. π. πλέον 2:7a (Ar. 11, 7). π. σπουδαιότερος 2 Cor 8:22b. Cp. π. τιμώτερον 1 Pt 1:7 v.l.; in the dat. of degree of difference πολλῷ μᾶλλον (Thu. 2, 51, 4; UPZ 42, 48 [162 B.C.]; EpArist 7; 24 al.; Sir prol. ln. 14; Jos., Ant. 18, 184; Just., A I, 68, 9; Tat. 17, 4) Mt 6:30; Mk 10:48b; Lk 18:39; Ro 5:9f, 15b, 17; 1 Cor 12:22; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; Phil 2:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρείσσον 1:23 (v.l. without μᾶλλον). πολλῷ πλείους J 4:41. πολλῷ στρουθίων as v.l. Mt 20:31 and Lk 12:7 (both N.25 app.; on the strong ms. support for this rdg. s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 21–24).—W. the art. τὸ πολύ (opp. τὸ ὀλίγον as X., An. 7, 7, 36) 2 Cor 8:15 (cp. Ex 16:18).
    ג. πολύς (Diod S 14, 107, 4 πολὺς ἦν ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ=he was strongly inclined toward punishing) μὴ πολὺς ἐν ῥήμασιν γίνου do not be profuse in speech, do not gossip 1 Cl 30:5 (Job 11:3).—Παπίας ὁ πολύς Papias (7), prob. to be understood as ὁ πάνυ; s. πάνυ d.
    comp. πλείων, πλεῖον; adv. πλειόνως
    α. adj., w. a singular (TestJob 35:2 διὰ πλείονος εὐωδίας) καρπὸν πλείονα more fruit J 15:2, 8 P66; Hs 5, 2, 4. τὸ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου the greater part of the throng 8, 1, 16. ἐπὶ πλείονα χρόνον for a longer time (PTebt 6:31 [II B.C.]) Ac 18:20. Foll. by gen. of comparison: πλείονα τιμήν more honor Hb 3:3b.—IPol 1:3a. Foll. by παρά τινα for comparison Hb 3:3a; 11:4; Hs 9, 18, 2. ὅσῳ πλείονος κατηξιώθημεν γνώσεως, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον 1 Cl 41:4.—τὸ πλεῖον μέρος as adv. acc. for the greater part Hv 3, 6, 4a.
    β. as subst. πλεῖον, πλέον more τὸ πλεῖον the greater sum (cp. Diod S 1, 82, 2=the greater part; Ps 89:10) Lk 7:43. πλεῖον λαμβάνειν receive a larger sum Mt 20:10. W. partitive gen. ἐπὶ πλεῖον προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας they will arrive at an ever greater measure of impiety=become more and more deeply involved in impiety 2 Ti 2:16. W. a gen. of comparison πλεῖον τῆς τροφῆς someth. greater (more important) than food Mt 6:25; Lk 12:23. πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ Mt 12:41; cp. vs. 42; Lk 11:31, 32. ἡ χήρα πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν the widow put in more than all the rest Mk 12:43; Lk 21:3. μηδὲν πλέον nothing more (Jos., Bell. 1, 43; cp. Just., D. 2, 3 οὐδὲν πλέον); the words than, except following are expressed by παρά and the acc. Lk 3:13 or by πλήν w. gen. Ac 15:28, w. εἰ μή Hs 1:6.—The acc. is used as an adv. more, in greater measure, to a greater degree (Herm. Wr. 13, 21 Nock after the mss.) Lk 7:42; IRo 1:1; IEph 6:2; w. a gen. of comparison Mt 5:20 (περισσεύω 1aβ); J 21:15; IPol 5:2 (s. Ad’Alès, RSR 25, ’35, 489–92). τριετίαν ἢ καὶ πλεῖον for three years or even more Ac 20:18 D (cp. TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27 [Stone p. 70, 27]).—ἐπὶ πλεῖον any farther (of place) Ac 4:17 (TestGad 7:2; Ath. 12 [ἐπί 4bβ]); (of time) at length Ac 20:9 (ἐπί 18cβ) or any longer, too long 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1 (ἐπί 18cβ); any more, even more (ἐπί 13) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). Strengthened πολὺ πλέον much more, much rather (4 Macc 1:8; cp. X., An. 7, 5, 15; BGU 180, 12f [172 A.D.] πολλῷ πλεῖον; Ar. 11, 7 πολλῷ πλεῖον) Dg 2:7; 4:5.—Also w. indications of number (s. 1bα) πλεῖον ἢ ἄρτοι πέντε Lk 9:13 (the words πλ. ἤ outside the constr. as X., An. 1, 2, 11). In πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων more than twelve legions of angels Mt 26:53 the text is uncertain (B-D-F §185, 4; s. Rob. 666).—The adv. can also be expressed by πλειόνως (Aeneas Tact. 237; Jos., Ant. 17, 2; Leontios 24, p. 52, 10) more ὅσον … πλειόνως the more … the more IEph 6:1.
    superl. πλεῖστος, ον
    α. adj.
    א. superlative proper τὸ πλεῖστον μέρος the greatest part w. partitive gen. Hs 8, 2, 9; 9, 7, 4. As adv. acc. for the greatest part 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1 (s. μέρος 1d).
    ב. elative (s. Mayser II/1, 1926, 53) very great, very large (ὁ) πλεῖστος ὄχλος Mt 21:8 (ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος could also be the greatest part of the crowd, as Thu. 7, 78, 2; Pla., Rep. 3, 397d); Mk 4:1.
    β. subst. οἱ πλεῖστοι the majority, most Ac 19:32 D (Just., D. 1, 4; cp. D. 48, 4 πλεῖστοι).
    pert. to being high on a scale of extent
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. as simple adj., to denote degree much, great, strong, severe, hard, deep, profound (Diod S 13, 7, 4 πολὺς φόβος; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57; 58 p. 265, 3 πολλὴ δικαιοσύνη; Eccl 5:16 θυμὸς π.; Sir 15:18 σοφία; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 4 [Stone p. 54] ἀθυμία; Just., D. 3, 1 ἠρεμία) ἀγάπη Eph 2:4. ἀγών 1 Th 2:2. ἄθλησις Hb 10:32. ἁπλότης Hv 3, 9, 1. ἀσιτία Ac 27:21. βία 24:6 [7] v.l. γογγυσμός J 7:12. διακονία Lk 10:40. δοκιμή 2 Cor 8:2. δόξα Mt 24:30; Hv 1, 3, 4; 2, 2, 6. δύναμις Mk 13:26. ἐγκράτεια strict self-control Hv 2, 3, 2. εἰρήνη complete or undisturbed peace (Diod S 3, 64, 7; 11, 38, 1) Ac 24:2. ἔλεος 1 Pt 1:3. ἐπιθυμία 1 Th 2:17. ζημία Ac 27:10. ζήτησις 15:7. θλῖψις 2 Cor 2:4a; 1 Th 1:6. καύχησις 2 Cor 7:4b (pred.). μακροθυμία Ro 9:22. ὀδυρμός Mt 2:18. παράκλησις 2 Cor 8:4. παρρησία (Wsd 5:1) 3:12; 7:4a (pred.); 1 Ti 3:13; Phlm 8. πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22c. πλάνη 2 Cl 1:7. πληροφορία 1 Th 1:5. πόνος Col 4:13. σιγή a great or general hush (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 25; Arrian, Anab. 5, 28, 4) Ac 21:40. στάσις 23:10. τρόμος 1 Cor 2:3. φαντασία Ac 25:23. χαρά 8:8; Phlm 7. ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) Mk 6:35ab.
    β. subst. πολλά in the acc. used as adv. greatly, earnestly, strictly, loudly, often etc. (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 14; Diod S 13, 41, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 19, 2; Aelian, VH 1, 23; 4 Km 10:18; Is 23:16; TestSol 1:1; GrBar; ApcMos; Jos., Ant. 14, 348) ἀλαλάζειν πολλά Mk 5:38 (s. ἀλαλάζω). πολλὰ ἁμαρτάνειν Hs 4:5c (ApcMos 32). π. ἀνακρίνειν Ac 28:18 v.l. π. ἀπορεῖν Mk 6:20 (Field, Notes 29). π. ἀσπάζεσθαι 1 Cor 16:19 (s. ἀσπάζομαι 1a). δεηθῆναι π. (GrBar 4:14; Jos., Vi. 173; 343) Hs 5, 4, 1. διαστέλλεσθαι Mk 5:43 (s. διαστέλλω). π. ἐπιτιμᾶν 3:12. π. ἐρωτᾶν earnestly pray Hv 2, 2, 1. κατηγορεῖν π. Mk 15:3 (s. κατηγορέω 1a). κηρύσσειν π. talk freely 1:45. κλαίειν bitterly Ac 8:24 D (ApcMos 39). κοπιᾶν (ApcMos 24; CIG IV 9552, 5 … μοι πολλὰ ἐκοπίασεν, cp. Dssm., LO 266, 5 [LAE 317]) work hard Ro 16:6, 12; 2 Cl 7:1b. νηστεύειν π. fast often Mt 9:14a. ὀμνύναι π. Mk 6:23. παρακαλεῖν Mk 5:10, 23; Ac 20:1 D; 1 Cor 16:12. π. πταίειν make many mistakes Js 3:2. π. σπαράσσειν convulse violently Mk 9:26a.—W. the art. ἐνεκοπτόμην τὰ πολλά I have been hindered these many times (cp. Ro 1:13 πολλάκις) Ro 15:22 (v.l. πολλάκις here too).
    γ. subst. πολύ in the acc. used as adv. greatly, very much, strongly (Da 6:15, 24 Theod.) ἀγαπᾶν πολύ show much affection, love greatly Lk 7:47b. κλαίειν π. weep loudly Rv 5:4.—Mk 12:27; Ac 18:27.
    superlative, the neut. acc. πλεῖστον, α as adv. (sing. Hom. et al.; pl. Pind. et al.)
    α. pl. πλεῖστα in the formula of greeting at the beginning of a letter πλεῖστα χαίρειν (POxy 742; 744; 1061 [all three I B.C.]; PTebt 314, 2 [II A.D.] and very oft. in pap.—Griech. pap ed. Ltzm.: Kl. Texte 142, 1910, p. 4, 5, 6, 7 al.; Preis. II s.v. πλεῖστος) heartiest greeting(s) IEph ins; IMg ins; ITr ins; IRo ins; ISm ins; IPol ins.
    β. sing. τὸ πλεῖστον at the most (Aristoph., Vesp. 260; Diod S 14, 71, 3 πεμπταῖοι ἢ τὸ πλ. ἑκταῖοι; POxy 58, 17; PGiss 65:9) κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλ. τρεῖς (word for word like Περὶ ὕψους 32, 1) 1 Cor 14:27.—B. 922f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πολύς

  • 13 ἀποδίδωμι

    ἀποδίδωμι, [tense] fut. - δώσω: [tense] aor. 1 ἀπέδωκα: [tense] aor. 2
    A

    ἀπέδων A.D.Synt. 276.9

    , shortened inf. ἀποδοῦν prob. in Hsch.:— give up or back, restore, return,

    τινί τι Hom.

    , etc.: esp. render what is due, pay, as debts, penalties, submission, honour, etc.,

    τοκεῦσι θρέπτρα Il.4.478

    ; ἀ. τινὶ λώβην give him back his insuit, i.e. make atonement for it, ib.9.387 (tm.);

    τὴν πλημμέλειαν LXXNu.5.7

    ;

    εὖ ἔρδοντι κακὴν ἀ. ἀμοιβήν Thgn.1263

    ;

    ἀ. τὴν ὁμοίην τινί Hdt.4.119

    ;

    ἀμοιβάς Democr.92

    ;

    κακὸν ἀντ' ἀγαθοῦ Id.93

    ; ἀ. τὸ μόρσιμον pay the debt of fate, Pi.N.7.44;

    τὸ χρέος Hdt.2.136

    ;

    τὸν ναῦλον Ar.Ra. 270

    ; τὴν ζημίαν, τὴν καταδίκην, Th.3.70, 5.50;

    τὴν φερνήν PEleph.1.11

    (iv B. C.);

    εὐχάς X.Mem.2.2.10

    ;

    ἀ. ὀπίσω ἐς Ἡρακλείδας τὴν ἀρχήν Hdt.1.13

    , etc.;

    πόλεις ἀ. τοῖς παρακαταθεμένοις Aeschin.3.85

    ;

    ἀ. χάριτας Lys.31.24

    ;

    οὐκ ἐς χάριν ἀλλ' ἐς ὀφείλημα τὴν ἀρετ ὴν ἀ. Th.2.40

    ;

    ἀ. χάριν τινός Isoc.6.73

    ; [

    τὴν πόλιν] ἀ. τοῖς ἐπιγιγνομένοις οἵανπερ παρὰ τῶν πατέρων παρελάβομεν X.HG7.1.30

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    ἔως κ' ἀπὸ πάντα δοθείη Od.2.78

    ; ἀ. μισθός, χάριτες, Ar.Eq. 1066, Th.3.63.
    2 assign,

    ταῖς γυναιξὶ μουσικὴν καὶ γυμναστικήν Pl.R. 456b

    ;

    τὸ δίκαιον καὶ τὸ συμφέρον Arist.Rh. 1354b3

    , cf. 1356a15;

    τὸ πρὸς ἀλκὴν ὅπλον ἀ. ἡφύσις Id.GA 759b3

    , etc.
    b refer to one, as belonging to his department,

    εἰς τοὺς κριτὰς τὴν κρίσιν Pl.Lg. 765b

    ; ἀ. εἰς τὴν βουλὴν περὶ αὐτῶν refer their case to the Council, Isoc.18.6, cf. Lys.22.2, etc.
    3 render, yield, of land, ἐπὶ διηκόσια ἀποδοῦναι (sc. καρπόν) yield fruit two hundred-fold, Hdt.1.193;

    τἅλλα δ' ἅν τις καταβάλη ἀπέδωκεν ὀρθεῶς Men.Georg.38

    ; ἤν ἡ χώρη κατὰ λόγον ἐπιδιδοῖ ἐς ὕψος καὶ τὸ ὅμοιον ἀποδιδοῖ ἐς αὔξησιν renders, makes a like increase in extent, Hdt.2.13:—hence perh. metaph.,

    τὸ ἔργον ἀ. Arist.EN 1106a16

    ;

    ἀ. δάκρυ E.HF 489

    .
    4 concede, allow, c. inf., suffer or allow a person to do,

    ἀ. τισὶ αὐτονομεῖσθαι Th.1.144

    , cf. 3.36;

    εἰ δὲ τοῖς μὲν.. ἐπιτάττειν ἀποδώσετε D.2.30

    ;

    ἀ. κολάζειν Id.23.56

    ;

    τῷ δικαστηρίῳ ἀποδίδοται τοῦ φόνου τὰς δίκας δικάζειν Lys.1.30

    ;

    ἀ. τινὶ ζητεῖν Arist.Pol. 1341b30

    , cf. Po. 1454b5; also

    οὔτε ἀπολογίας ἀποδοθείσης And.4.3

    ; ἐπειδὰν αὐτοῖς ὁ λόγος ἀποδοθῆ when right of speech is allowed them, Aeschin.3.54.
    5 ἀ. τινά with an Adj., render or make so and so, like ἀποδείκνυμι, ἀ. τὴν τέρψιν βεβαιοτέραν Isoc.1.46;

    τέλειον ἀ. τὸ τέκνον Arist.GA 733b1

    ;

    δεῖ τὰς ἐνεργείας ποιὰς ἀ. Id.EN 1103b22

    ;

    μετριωτέραν τὴν ὑπερηφανίαν D.H.7.16

    .
    b exhibit, display,

    τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἀρετήν And.1.109

    ; ἀ. τὴν ἰδίαν μορφήν render, express it, Arist.Po. 1454b10; ἀ. φαντασίαν τινός present appearance of, Phld.Ir.p.71 W., al.
    6 deliver over, give up, e.g. as a slave, E. Cyc. 239;

    ἀ. τὸν μιαρὸν τῶ χρόνῳ φῆναι Antipho 4.4.11

    .
    7 ἀ. ἐπιστολήν deliver a letter, Th.7.10, cf. E.IT 745.
    8 ἀ. τὸν ἀγῶνα ὀρθῶς καὶ καλῶς bring it to a conclusion, Lycurg.149.
    9 λόγον ἀ. render an account, D.27.48:—[voice] Pass., μαρτυρίαι ἀ. Test. ap. D.18.137.
    10 ἀ. ὅρκον, v. ὅρκος.
    11 give an account or definition of a thing, explain it, E.Or. 150;

    ἀ. τί ἐστί τι Arist.Cat. 2b8

    , cf. 1a10, Metaph. 1040b30, al.; ἑπομένως τούτοις ἀ. τὴν ψυχήν Id.de.An. 405a4, cf. Ph. 194b34, al.; also, use by way of definition,

    ὁ μὲν τὴν ὕλην ἀποδίδωσιν, ὁ δὲ τὸ εἶδος Id.de An. 403b1

    ; simply, define,

    τὸν ἄνθρωπον S.E.M.7.272

    ; expound, Phld.D.3.14, cf. Epicur.Nat.14.3, 119G., 143 G.; render, interpret one word by another,

    ἀ. τὴν κοτύλην ἄλεισον Ath.11.479c

    ; explain, interpret,

    τὸ φωνὴν αἵματος βοᾶν Ph.1.209

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    βέλτιον ἀποδοθήσεται Epicur.Ep.1

    P.15 U.;

    ἀκριβεστέρως ἀποδοθήσεται A.D.Synt.45.21

    ;

    ἀ. τι πρός τι

    use with reference to,

    Olymp.in Mete.281.10

    , cf. Sch.Ar.Pl. 538.
    12 attach or append, make dependent upon, τί τινι or

    εἴς τι Hero Aut.24.5

    , 6, 2.
    13 ἀ. τί τινος assign a property to a thing, Arist.Top. 128b28.
    II intr., return, recur, Id.GA 722a8, HA 585b32.
    2 Rhet. and Gramm., introduce a clause answering to the πρότασις, Id.Rh. 1407a20;

    διὰ μακροῦ ἀ. D.H.Dem.9

    , etc.; cf.

    ἀπόδοσις 11.2

    ; οὐκ ἀποδίδωσι τὸ ἐπεί has no apodosis, Sch.Od.3.103; esp. in similes, complete the comparison, Arist.Rh. 1413a11.
    3 in Tactics, turn back to face the enemy,

    εἰς ὀρθόν Ascl.Tact.10.12

    , etc.
    4 Medic. in [voice] Pass., to be evacuated,

    σὺν τοῖς περιττώμασιν Dsc.4.82

    .
    III [voice] Med., give away of one's own will, sell, Ar.Av. 585, Hdt.1.70, etc.; ἀ. τι ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα take to Greece and sell it there, Id.2.56: c. gen. pretii, Ar.Ach. 830, Pax 1237;

    οὐκ ἄν ἀπεδόμην πολλοῦ τὰς ἐλπίδας Pl.Phd. 98b

    ; ἀ. τῆς ἀξίας, τοῦ εὑρίσκοντος, sell for its worth, for what it will fetch, Aeschin.1.96; ὅταν τις οἰκέτην πονηρὸν πωλῆ (= offer for sale)

    καὶ ἀποδῶται τοῦ εὑρόντος X.Mem.2.5.5

    , cf. Thphr. Char.15.4;

    διδοῦσι [τὰς νέας] πενταδράχμους ἀποδόμενοι Hdt.6.89

    ; ἀ. εἰσαγγελίαν sell, i.e. take a bribe to forgo, the information, D.25.47;

    οἱ δραχμῆς ἄν ἀποδόμενοι τὴν πόλιν X.HG 2.3.48

    ; at Athens, esp. farm out the public taxes, D.20.60, opp. ὠνέομαι: metaph.,

    οἷον πρὸς ἄργυρον τὴν δόξαν τὰς ψυχάς Jul.Or.1.42b

    :—[voice] Act. and [voice] Med. are distinguished in Lex ap.And.1.97 πάντα ἀποδόμενος τὰ ἡμίσεα ἀποδώσω τῷ ἀποκτείναντι: but [voice] Act. is used in med. sense in Th.6.62 (s.v.l.), cf. Foed.Delph.Pell. 2 A 22, and possibly in E.Cyc. 239, Ar.Ra. 1235: [voice] Med. for [voice] Act. in Antipho Fr.54:—[voice] Pass., to be sold, Hsch.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀποδίδωμι

  • 14 συντελέω

    συντελέω fut. συντελέσω; 1 aor. συνετέλεσα LXX. Pass.: 1 fut. συντελεσθήσομαι; 1 aor. συνετελέσθην; pf. 2 pl. συντετέλεσθε Gen 44:5, 3 sg. συντετέλεσται LXX, ptc. συντετελεσμένος LXX, inf. συντετελέσθαι 2 Macc 3:32 (Thu.+).
    to complete someth. that has been in process, bring to an end, complete, finish, close τὶ someth. (Diod S 1, 3, 2; PGM 3, 90 [=RMerkelbach/MTotti, Abrasax ’90, p. 88 ln. 90]; Philo, Ebr. 53; Jos., Ant. 15, 269; Just., A I, 65, 3) Hs 8, 11, 1; 9, 7, 1; 9, 29, 4. πάντα πειρασμόν Lk 4:13. A teaching, a speech, λόγους Mt 7:28 v.l. τὰς ἐντολάς Hm 12, 3, 2. Abs., though the obj. is to be supplied fr. the context B 15:3f (Gen 2:2). Pass., of the building of a tower (cp. PSI 407, 2 [III B.C.] ἐπειδή σοι [=by you] τὰ ἔργα [s. ἔργον 3] συντετέλεσται; Berosus: 680 Fgm. 8 a, 140 Jac. [in Jos., C. Ap. 1, 140]) Hv 3, 4, 2; 3, 8, 9; Hs 9, 5, 2.
    to carry out or bring into being someth. that has been promised or expected, carry out, fulfill, accomplish τὶ someth. (Polyb. 4, 81, 3; Diod S 4, 53, 2 συντελέσαι τὴν ὑπόσχεσιν=keep one’s word; Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 1, 11 Jac. perform an act of expiation; Jos., Bell. 7, 392; Just., A I, 32, 6) τὰ προγεγραμμένα Hs 5, 3, 7 (v.l. γεγραμμένα). Of God λόγον carry out (his) word, bring (his) word to accomplishment (cp. Sb 717, 2, 25 [217 B.C.] εὐχαριστῶν τοῖς θεοῖς ἐπὶ τῷ συντελέσαι αὐτοὺς ἃ ἐπηγγείλαντο αὐτῷ; Polystrat. p. 10 τ. θεὸν συντελεῖν ταῦτα κατὰ βούλησιν; La 2:17; the magical ins fr. Ashmunên published by the Soc. Ital. per la Ricerca dei Papiri Greci in Egitto, in Omaggio for the conf. of classical philologists, April 1911, no. 5, 40 ναὶ κύριε βασιλεῦ χθονίων θεῶν συντέλεσον τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα τῷ πεδάλῳ τούτῳ=Yes, Lord and King of the netherworld deities, bring to pass the things written on this leaf; PGM 3, 121; 57, 2) Ro 9:28 (Is 10:22). συντελέσω διαθήκην (Jer 41:8, 15) καινήν I will bring a new covenant to accomplishment Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31 διαθήσομαι), or simply I will establish a new covenant (ς.=‘make’ X., Cyr. 6, 1, 50; Demosth. 21, 22).—Perh. Mk 13:4 (s. 4 below), if it is to be translated when all this is to be accomplished (Diod S 2, 30, 1 everything is accomplished by a decision of the gods.—In 17, 1, 2 συντελεῖσθαι is simply ‘happen’). Cp. B 12:1 (prophetic saying of unknown origin). πρᾶξις συντελεῖται a course of action finds application Hm 4, 1, 11 (Diod S 26, 7 ἀσεβῆ συνετελέσατο πρᾶξιν=he perpetrated an impious deed).
    to exhaust the supply of someth., pass. w. act. sense give out συνετελέσθη ὁ οἶνος τοῦ γάμου J 2:3 v.l. (the act. = ‘blot out, destroy’ Jer 14:12; Ezk 7:15; TestLevi 5:4; corresp. the pass. Jer 14:15; 16:4; TestDan 6:4).
    to come to the end of a duration, come to an end, be over (Dt 34:8; Job 1:5; Tob 10:7) Lk 2:21 v.l.; 4:2; Ac 21:27; B 16:6 (quot. of uncertain origin). Perh. this is the place for ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα when all this (colloq.: when the time is when all this cp. vs. 2) is to come to an end Mk 13:4 (s. 2 above).—DELG s.v. τέλος. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > συντελέω

  • 15 τελέω

    τελέω fut. τελέσω; 1 aor. ἐτέλεσα; pf. τετέλεκα. Pass.: 1 fut. τελεσθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐτελέσθην; perf. τετέλεσμαι (Hom.+).
    to complete an activity or process, bring to an end, finish, complete τὶ someth. ταῦτα Hs 8, 2, 5. τὸν δρόμον (Il. 23, 373; 768; Soph., El. 726) 2 Ti 4:7. τοὺς λόγους τούτους Mt 7:28; 19:1; 26:1 (cp. Just., D. 110, 1). τὰς παραβολὰς ταύτας 13:53. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 11:7. τὴν εὐχήν GJs 9:1. τὴν ἐξήγησιν Hv 3, 7, 4. τὰ γράμματα 2, 1, 4. τελέσας τὴν χαράκωσιν when he had finished the fencing Hs 5, 2, 3. τελεῖν πάντα τὰ κατὰ τὸν νόμον Lk 2:39 (τελ. πάντα as Jos., Ant. 16, 318). τελ. τὰς πόλεις τοῦ Ἰσραήλ finish (going through) the cities of Israel Mt 10:23 (on this pass. KWeiss, Exegetisches z. Irrtumslosigkeit u. Eschatologie Jesu Christi 1916, 184–99; JDupont, NovT 2, ’58, 228–44; AFeuillet, CBQ 23, ’61, 182–98; MKünzi, Das Naherwartungslogion Mt 10:23, ’70 [history of interp.]). Foll. by a ptc. to designate what is finished (B-D-F §414, 2; Rob. 1121; cp. Josh 3:17; JosAs 15:12) ἐτέλεσεν διατάσσων Mt 11:1. Cp. Lk 7:1 D; Hv 1, 4, 1.—Pass. be brought to an end, be finished, completed of the building of the tower (cp. 2 Esdr 5:16; 16: 15) Hv 3, 4, 1f; 3, 5, 5; 3, 9, 5; Hs 9, 5, 1; 9, 10, 2 (τὸ ἔργον). τελεσθέντος τοῦ δείπνου GJs 6:3 (TestAbr A 5 p. 81, 32 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 21:8). ὡς … ἐτελέσθη ὁ πλοῦς AcPl Ha 7, 35. Of time come to an end, be over (Hom. et al.; Aristot., HA 7, 1, 580a, 14 ἐν τοῖς ἔτεσι τοῖς δὶς ἑπτὰ τετελεσμένοις; Lucian, Alex. 38) Lk 2:6 D; sim. τοῦ ἐξεῖναι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην AcPl Ha 6, 15; τὰ χίλια ἔτη Rv 20:3, 5, 7. πάντα τετέλεσται J 19:28 (GDalman, Jesus-Jeschua 1922, 211–18 [tr. PLevertoff 1929, same pages].—Diagoras of Melos in Sext. Emp., Adv. Math. 9, 55 κατὰ δαίμονα κ. τύχην πάντα τελεῖται=‘everything is accomplished acc. to divine will and fortune’; an anonymous writer of mimes [II A.D.] in OCrusius, Herondas5 [p. 110–16] ln. 175 τοῦτο τετέλεσται); cp. τετέλεσται used absolutely in vs. 30 (if these two verses are to be taken as referring to the carrying out [s. 2 below] of divine ordinances contained in the Scriptures, cp. Diod S 20, 26, 2 τετελέσθαι τὸν χρησμόν=the oracle had been fulfilled; Ael. Aristid. 48, 7 K.=24 p. 467 D.: μέγας ὁ Ἀσκληπιός• τετέλεσται τὸ πρόσταγμα. Cp. Willibald Schmidt, De Ultimis Morientium Verbis, diss. Marburg 1914. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 370 interprets the two verses in both a chronological and theol. sense. Diod S 15, 87, 6 reports the four last sayings of Epaminondas, two in indirect discourse and the other two in direct. S. also the last words of Philip s.v. πληρόω 5).—ἡ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται power finds its consummation or reaches perfection in (the presence of) weakness 2 Cor 12:9. The passives in Rv 10:7 (the aor. suggests the ‘final clearing up of all the insoluble riddles and problems of human life’: EBlakeney, The Epistle to Diognetus ’43, ’67); 15:1, 8; 17:17 belong under 2 as well as here.
    to carry out an obligation or demand, carry out, accomplish, perform, fulfill, keep τὶ someth. (Hom.+. Of rites, games, processions, etc., dedicated to a divinity or ordained by it: Eur., Bacch. 474 τὰ ἱερά; Pla., Laws 775a; X., Resp. Lac. 13, 5; Plut., Mor. 671 al.; Just., A II, 12, 5 μυστήρια; Mel., P. 16, 102 μυστήριον al.; in ins freq. of public service, e.g. IPriene 111, 22 an embassy) τὸν νόμον carry out the demands of, keep the law Ro 2:27; Js 2:8. τὴν ἐντολήν Hs 5, 2, 4 (Jos., Bell. 2, 495 τὰς ἐντολάς). τὸ ἔργον (Theogn. 914; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 742; Sir 7:25) 2:7a; 5, 2, 7. τὴν διακονίαν m 2:6ab; 12, 3, 3; Hs 2:7b; pass. m 2:6c. τὰς διακονίας Hs 1:9. τὴν νηστείαν 5, 1, 5; 5, 3, 8. ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς τελεῖν carry out what the flesh desires, satisfy one’s physical desires (Artem. 3, 22; Achilles Tat. 2, 13, 3 αὑτῷ τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν τελέσαι) Gal 5:16. ὡς ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα when they had carried out everything that was written (in the Scriptures) concerning him Ac 13:29 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 59 §243 τὸ κεκριμένον τ.=carry out what was decided upon). Pass. Lk 18:31; 22:37 (cp. pass. cited 1, end). ἕως ὅτου τελεσθῇ until it (the baptism) is accomplished Lk 12:50. ἵνα ὁ τύπος τελεσθῇ in order that the type might be fulfilled B 7:3.
    to pay what is due, pay (Hom., Pla., et al.; pap; Jos., Ant. 2, 192 al.) φόρους (Ps.-Pla., Alc. 1, 123a τὸν φόρον; Appian, Syr. 44 §231; PFay 36, 14 [111/12 A.D.]; Philo, Agr. 58; Jos., Ant. 15, 106; Just., A I, 17, 2 φόρους τελεῖν [Luke 20:22]; Tat. 4:1) Ro 13:6. τὰ δίδραχμα Mt 17:24. V.l. for τελευτάω Papias (4).—B. 797. DELG s.v. τέλος. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > τελέω

  • 16 πιστεύω

    πιστεύω (Trag.+) impf. ἐπίστευον; 1 aor. ἐπίστευσα; pf. πεπίστευκα; plpf. πεπιστεύκειν Ac 14:23 (on the omission of the augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190). Pass.: fut. 3 pl. πιστευθήσονται Gen 42, 20; 1 aor. ἐπιστεύθην; pf. πεπίστευμαι (the word does not occur in Phlm, 2 Pt, 2 and 3J, Rv, MPol, or D. But it is a special favorite of J and 1J, where it is found 96 times and 9 times respectively; πίστις is not found in the gospel at all, and occurs in 1J only once, 5:4. Our lit. uses it quite predominantly in a transcendent sense, or at least w. transcendent coloring).
    to consider someth. to be true and therefore worthy of one’s trust, believe
    believe (in) someth., be convinced of someth., w. that which one believes (in) indicated
    α. by acc. of thing (Soph., Oed. Rex 646 τάδε; Aristot., Analyt. Pr. 2, 23, 68b, 13 ἅπαντα; PSI 494, 14 μηθέν; UPZ 70, 29 [152/151 B.C.] π. τὰ ἐνύπνια; ApcEsdr 7:12 p. 32, 26 τὸ βιβλίον τοῦτο) ἡ ἀγάπη πάντα πιστεύει 1 Cor 13:7. πεπιστεύκαμεν τὴν ἀγάπην we believe in the love 1J 4:16. πιστεύεις τοῦτο; J 11:26b. Cp. Ac 13:41 (Hab 1:5). Pass. ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν our testimony was believed 2 Th 1:10b (cp. Aristot., EN 10, 2 p. 1172b, 15 ἐπιστεύοντο οἱ λόγοι; Gen 42:20).
    β. by means of a ὅτι-clause believe that (Plut., Mor. 210d; Aelian, VH 1, 16 p. 8, 9; Herm. Wr. 4, 4: Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 24; PLond III, 897, 12 p. 207 [I A.D.]; Tob 10:8 S; Job 9:16; 15:31; 39:12; La 4:12; 4 Macc 7:19; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 18 [Stone p. 48]; ParJer 6:7; Just., A I, 18, 2 al.; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 89, 16) μακαρία ἡ πιστεύσασα ὅτι ἔσται τελείωσις Lk 1:45 (ὅτι here may=for: s. ὅτι 4b).—Mk 11:23; cp. vs. 24; J 8:24 (ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι as Is 43:10); 11:27, 42; 13:19; 14:10; 16:27, 30; 17:8, 21; 20:31a; Ac 9:26; Ro 6:8; 10:9; 1 Th 4:14; Hb 11:6; Js 2:19a; 1J 5:1, 5; Hv 3, 8, 4; 4, 2, 4; m 1:1; 6, 2, 10b; Hs 2:5.—[ὅτι εἷς θεός] καὶ εἷς χριστός AcPl Ha 1, 17; AcPlCor 1:8. π. περί τινος ὅτι believe concerning someone that J 9:18 (M. Ant. 1, 15, 5 πιστεύειν περὶ ὧν λέγοι ὅτι οὕτως φρονεῖ=believe concerning whatever he might say, that it was what he actually thought; Just., D. 10, 1 π. ἡμῶν• ὅτι ἐσθίομεν ἀνθρώπους.—π. περί τινος as Plut., Lyc. 19, 4; Jos., Ant. 14, 267).
    γ. by the acc. and inf. (pres. Pla., Gorg. 524a; PTebt 314, 3 [II A.D.]; 4 Macc 5:25; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 160; Just., A I, 8, 2 al.; Ath. 20, 3) πιστεύω τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ εἶναι τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ac 8:37b.—GMary 463, 8.—IRo 10:2.—By the inf. (Thu 2, 22, 1; Job 15:22; AscIs 2:10 εἰς οὐρανὸν ἀναβῆναι) πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι Ac 15:11 (difft. JNolland, NTS 27, ’80, 112f [inf. of result: ‘we believe (in order) to be saved’]).—By the acc. and ptc. ἐν σαρκὶ αὐτὸν πιστεύω ὄντα I believe that he was in the flesh ISm 3:1.
    δ. by means of the dat. of thing give credence to, believe (Aeschyl., Pers. 786 θεῶν θεσφάτοισιν; Soph., Phil. 1374 τοῖς ἐμοῖς λόγοις, El. 886; Pla., Phd. 88c, Leg. 7, 798d; Polyb. 5, 42, 9; 9, 33, 1; Herodian 7, 5, 5 ἐλπίδι κρείττονι; BGU 674, 6 τῷ λόγῳ; 2 Ch 9:6 τοῖς λόγοις; Ps 105:24; Pr 14:15; Sir 19:15; En 104:13 ταῖς βίβλοις; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 229 τοῖς κενοῖς λογισμοῖς, Virt. 68 the sayings of God; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 286, Ant. 10, 39 τ. λόγοις; Tat. 18, 2 ὕλης οἰκονομία; Ath. 30, 2 ταῖς γοναῖς τοῦ Διό; Iren. 1, 10, 2 [Harv. I 92, 4] ἡ ἐκκλησία … π. τούτοις [sc. κήρυγμα and πίστις]) οὐκ ἐπίστευσας τοῖς λόγοις μου Lk 1:20 (cp. Iambl., ViPyth. 28, 148 περὶ θεῶν μηδὲν θαυμαστὸν ἀπιστεῖν ‘concerning the gods nothing is so marvelous that it should occasion unbelief’). τῇ γραφῇ καὶ τῷ λόγῳ J 2:22. Cp. 4:50; 5:47ab. τοῖς γεγραμμένοις Ac 24:14 (Diod S 16, 52, 7 πιστεύσαντες τοῖς γεγραμμένοις). τῇ ἐπαγγελίᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cl 11:1 (Diod S 1, 53, 10 τῇ τοῦ προρρήσει πιστεύειν; 19, 90, 3). τῷ ψεύδει, τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 2 Th 2:11, 12. τῇ καταλαλιᾷ Hm 2:2. τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν (Is 53:1; cp. Jos., C. Ap. 2, 14 π. ἀκοῇ πρεσβυτέρων) J 12:38; Ro 10:16; 1 Cl 16:3. τοῖς ἔργοις J 10:38b (=their testimony); Hm 6, 2, 10a (that they are good and must be followed).—Pass. ἐπιστεύθη τῷ λόγῳ μου they believed my word Hm 3:3.
    ε. w. prepositional expressions: εἰς Ro 4:18, if εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτόν here is dependent on ἐπίστευσεν. πιστεύειν εἰς τὴν μαρτυρίαν believe in the witness 1J 5:10c. ὁ Χριστιανισμὸς οὐκ εἰς Ἰουδαϊσμὸν ἐπίστευσεν the Christian way of life/Christianity did not commit itself to the Judean way/Judaism (s. Hdb. ad loc.) I Mg 10:3a; cp. b (Χριστιανισμόν, εἰς ὸ̔ν πᾶσα γλῶσσα πιστεύσασα). On πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄνομά τινος s. 2aβ below. πιστεύετε ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ believe in the gospel (so Ps 105:12 ἐπίστευσαν ἐν τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ. Rather in the sense ‘put one’s trust in’ Sir 32:21 μὴ πιστεύσῃς ἐν ὁδῷ ἀπροσκόπῳ. See B-D-F §187, 6; Rob. 540. ALoisy, Les Évangiles synopt. I 1907, 430; 434; comm.) Mk 1:15 (Hofmann understands it as ‘on the basis of’, Wohlenberg ‘bei’; Lohmeyer is undecided; Dssm. and Mlt. 67f ‘in the sphere of’; s. p. 235). ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ οὐ πιστεύω IPhld 8:2 (s. Bihlmeyer ad loc.).—ἐπί τινι: πιστεύειν ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33 (Is 28:16).
    w. the pers. to whom one gives credence or whom one believes, in the dat. (Demosth. 18, 10; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 14 p. 1390a, 32; Polyb. 15, 26, 6 τοῖς εἰδόσι τὴν ἀλήθειαν; Herodian 2, 1, 10; PHib 72, 18; POxy 898, 29; PTebt 418, 15; Ex 4:1, 5; 3 Km 10:7; 2 Ch 32:15; Tob 2:14; Jer 47:14; JosAs 13:10; Philo, Praem. 49; Just., A I, 33, 5, D 7, 2 al.) τοῖς θεασαμένοις αὐτὸν ἐγηγερμένον οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν they did not believe those who saw him after he was raised from the dead Mk 16:14. Cp. Mt 21:25, 32abc; Mk 11:31; 16:13; Lk 20:5; J 5:46a; Ac 8:12; 26:27a (τ. προφήταις as Jos., Ant. 11, 96); 1J 4:1; Hm 6, 1, 2ab.—Also of Jesus and God whom one believes, in that one accepts their disclosures without doubt or contradiction: Jesus: Mt 27:42 v.l.; J 5:38, 46b; 6:30; 8:45, 46; 10:37, 38a. God: J 5:24; Ro 4:3 (Gen 15:6), 17 κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ (= κατέναντι θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστευσεν); Gal 3:6; Js 2:23; 1 Cl 10:6 (all three Gen 15:6). ὁ μὴ πιστεύων τῷ θεῷ ψεύστην πεποίηκεν αὐτόν 1J 5:10b. AcPl Ha 3, 7.
    w. pers. and thing added π. τινί τι believe someone with regard to someth. (X., Apol. 15 μηδὲ ταῦτα εἰκῇ πιστεύσητε τῷ θεῷ) Hm 6, 2, 6.—W. dat. of pers. and ὅτι foll. (ApcEsdr 4:35 p. 29, 12 Tdf.): πιστεύετέ μοι ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρί J 14:11a. Cp. 4:21; Ac 27:25.
    abs. (in which case the context supplies the obj., etc.; cp. ParJer 7:19 γέγονε δὲ τοῦτο, ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν) ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ• ἰδοὺ ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, μὴ πιστεύσητε do not believe (him or it [the statement]) Mt 24:23; cp. vs. 26; Mk 13:21; Lk 22:67; J 3:12ab; 10:25f; 12:47 v.l.; 14:29; 16:31; 19:35; 20:8, 25; cp. GJs 19:3. J 20:29ab πιστεύσαντες those who have nevertheless believed (it=the fact of the Resurrection); Ac 4:4; 26:27b; 1 Cor 11:18 πιστεύω I believe (it=that there are divisions among you); 15:11; Js 2:19b even the daemons believe this; Jd 5. Pass. καρδίᾳ πιστεύεται with (or in) the heart men believe (it=that Jesus was raised fr. the dead) Ro 10:10.
    believe = let oneself be influenced κατά τινος against someone Pol 6:1.
    πιστεύομαι I am believed, I enjoy confidence (X., An. 7, 6, 33; Diod S 5, 80, 4 τοῖς μάλιστα πιστευομένοις ἐπηκολουθήσαμεν; 17, 32, 1; 1 Km 27:12; Jos., Ant. 10, 114; PGM 12, 279 πιστευθήσῃ=you will be believed) of Eve παρθένος πιστεύεται people believe that she is a virgin Dg 12:8, or perh. a virgin is entrusted (to someone without fear). S. 3 below.
    to entrust oneself to an entity in complete confidence, believe (in), trust, w. implication of total commitment to the one who is trusted. In our lit. God and Christ are objects of this type of faith that relies on their power and nearness to help, in addition to being convinced that their revelations or disclosures are true. The obj. is
    given
    α. in the dat. (cp. Soph., Philoct. 1374 θεοῖς πιστ.; X., Mem. 1, 1, 5; Ps.-Pla., Epinom. 980c πιστεύσας τοῖς θεοῖς εὔχου; Ptolem. Lagi [300 B.C.]: 138 Fgm. 8 Jac.; Maximus Tyr. 3, 8k τῷ Ἀπόλλωνι; Epict., app. E, 10 p. 488 Sch. θεῷ; Himerius, Or. 8 [=23], 18 πῶς Διονύσῳ πιστεύσω; how can I trust D.?; UPZ 144, 12 [164 B.C.] τ. θεοῖς; Jdth 14:10; Wsd 16:26; 4 Macc 7:21 al. in LXX; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 229 πιστεύειν θεῷ, Rer. Div. Her. 92 μόνῳ θεῷ, Op. M. 45, Sacr. Abel. 70 τῷ σωτήρι θεῷ, Abr. 269, Mos. 1, 225, Virt. 216 [on faith in Philo s. Bousset, Rel.3 446ff; EHatch, Essays in Biblical Gk. 1889, 83ff; ASchlatter, D. Glaube im NT4 1927; EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1908, 21925; HWindisch, Die Frömmigkeit Philos 1909, 23ff; HWolfson, Philo ’47 I, 143–56, esp. II, 215–18; WPeisker, D. Glaubensbegriff bei Philon, diss. ’36]; Jos., Ant. 2, 117; 333; 3, 309; 20, 48, Bell. 3, 387 [s. ASchlatter, D. Theol. d. Judentums nach d. Bericht des Jos. ’32, 104ff]; Just., A I, 18, 6 al.). Some of the passages referred to in 1b above, end, are repeated, since they may be classified here or there w. equal justification. Of God: π. τῷ θεῷ (Orig., C. Cels. 4, 89, 15) Ac 16:34; 13:12 D; Tit 3:8; PtK 4 p. 16, 2; B 16:7; Hm 12, 6, 2; Hs 5, 1, 5. Cp. m 1:2; AcPl Ha 10, 13f. τῷ κυρίῳ (Sir 11:21; 2:8) Hv 4, 2, 6. οἱ πιστεύσαντες τῷ κυρίῳ διὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 13, 5. τῷ θεῷ w. ὅτι foll. m 9:7; cp. Hs 1:7.—Of Christ: Mt 27:42 v.l. (for ἐπʼ αὐτόν); J 6:30 (σοί=vs. 29 εἰς ὸ̔ν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος); J 8:31 (αὐτῷ=vs. 30 εἰς αὐτόν, but see Mlt. 67f; JSwetnam argues for a plpf. sense here: Biblica 61, ’80, 106–9); Ac 5:14; 18:8a (both τῷ κυρίῳ); Ro 10:14b (οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν = τούτῳ [about equivalent to εἰς τοῦτον; cp. vs. 14a] οὗ οὐκ ἤκ.); 2 Ti 1:12; ITr 9:2; Hs 8, 3, 2.—Pass. be believed in (X., Cyr. 4, 2, 8; 6, 1, 39; Pla., Lach. 181b; Ps.-Demosth. 58, 44 al.; 1 Km 27:12; Just., D. 7, 3; Tat. 10, 2. S. B-D-F §312, 1; also s. Rob. 815f) ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ 1 Ti 3:16.—π. τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ υἱοῦ believe in the name of the Son, i.e. believe in the Son and accept what his name proclaims him to be 1J 3:23.
    β. w. εἰς (cp. Hippol., Elench. 6, 19, 7 W. οἱ εἰς τὸν Σίμωνα καὶ τὴν Ἑλένην πεπιστευκότες; Just., D. 35, 8 al.) God (BGU 874, 11 π. εἰς τὸν θεόν): J 12:44b; 14:1a (cp. ET 21, 1910, 53–57; 68–70; 138f); 1 Pt 1:21 v.l.=Pol 2:1.—Christ: Mt 18:6; Mk 9:42; J 2:11; 3:15 v.l., 16, 18a, 36; 4:39; 6:29, 35, 40, 47 v.l.; 7:5, 31, 38f, 48; 8:30; 9:35f; 10:42; 11:25, 26a, 45, 48; 12:11, 36 (εἰς τὸ φῶς), 37, 42, 44a, 46; 14:1b, 12; 16:9; 17:20; Ac 10:43; 14:23; 18:8 D; 19:4; Ro 10:14a; Gal 2:16; Phil 1:29; 1 Pt 1:8; 1J 5:10a; AcPlCor 2:31; Hs 8, 3, 2.—εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ (or αὐτοῦ, etc.) J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18c; 1J 5:13 (s. ὄνομα 1dβ and s. 2aα above, end). π. εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ITr 2:1. π. εἰς τὸ αἷμα Χριστοῦ ISm 6:1.
    γ. w. ἐπί and dat., of God Ac 11:17 D. Of Christ: Mt 27:42 v.l.; J 3:15 v.l.; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16); 1 Ti 1:16.
    δ. w. ἐπί and acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 46, 1 al.) of God: Ac 16:34 D; Ro 4:5, 24; PtK 3 p. 15, 12. Of Christ: Mt 27:42; J 3:15 v.l.; Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19.
    ε. π. ἔν τινι believe in someone (Jer 12:6; Da 6:24 Theod.; Ps 77:22) is questionable in our lit.: in J 3:15 the best rdg. is ἐν αὐτῷ and is prob. to be construed w. ἔχῃ (in J πιστεύω usually takes the prep. εἰς when expressing the obj. of belief, as in 3:16); in Eph 1:13 both occurrences of ἐν ᾧ are prob. to be construed w. ἐσφραγίσθητε (=‘in connection with whom you have been sealed’ [cp. 4:30]); the acts of hearing and believing are coordinate, and πιστεύσαντες, along w. ἀκούσαντες, is used abs. (so REB; less clearly NRSV). But s. 1aε above: π. ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ Mk 1:15; IPhld 8:2.
    not expressed at all (the abs. πιστεύειν in a transcendent sense: Aeschin., In Ctesiph. 1 ἐγὼ πεπιστευκὼς ἥκω πρῶτον τοῖς θεοῖς; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 17, 1391b, 1ff; Plut., Mor. 170f; Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 24 πιστεῦσαι δεῖ, ὅτι [=because] μόνη σωτηρία ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἐπιστροφή; Herm. Wr. 9, 10ab ἐπίστευσε καὶ ἐν τῇ καλῇ πίστει ἐπανεπαύσατο; cp. 1, 32 πιστεύω καὶ μαρτυρῶ=PapBerl 9795 [RReitzenstein, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, p. 161, 2]; Num 20:12; Ps 115:1; Is 7:9; Sir 2:13; 1 Macc 2:59; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 14; 101, Deus Imm. 4, Mut. Nom. 178; τότε πιστεύσεις θέλων καὶ μὴ θέλων Theoph. Ant. 1, 8 [p. 74, 7]) Mk 15:32; 16:16f; Lk 8:12f; J 1:7, 50; 3:15, 18b; 4:41f, 48, 53; 5:44; 6:36, 47, 64ab, perh. 69 (MEnslin, The Perf. Tense in the Fourth Gosp.: JBL 55, ’36, 121–31, esp. 128); 9:38; 10:26; 11:15, 40; 12:39; 20:31b; Ac 4:4; 8:13, 37a; 11:21; 13:12, 39, 48; 14:1; 15:5, 7; 17:12, 34; 18:8b, 27; 19:2; 21:25; Ro 1:16; 3:22; 4:11; 10:4; 13:11; 15:13; 1 Cor 1:21; 3:5; 15:2; Gal 3:22; Eph 1:13, 19; 1 Th 2:10, 13; Hb 4:3; 1 Pt 2:7; 1 Cl 12:7; 2 Cl 17:3; 20:2; B 9:3; B 11:11; ISm 3:2; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 17, 4; 9, 22, 3. τὸ πιστεύειν faith IMg 9:2. ἐν ἀγάπῃ πιστεύειν IPhld 9:2 (ἐν ἀγάπῃ is here used adv.).—Participles in the var. tenses are also used almost subst.: (οἱ) πιστεύοντες (the) believers, (the) Christians (Orig., C. Cels. 1, 13, 34; Did., Gen. 106, 6) Ac 2:44; Ro 3:22; 1 Cor 14:22ab (opp. οἱ ἄπιστοι); 1 Th 1:7; Hs 8, 3, 3. (οἱ) πιστεύσαντες (those) who made their commitment = (those) who became believers, (the) Christians, Ac 2:44 v.l.; 4:32; 2 Th 1:10a; 2 Cl 2:3; Hs 9, 19, 1. οἱ πεπιστευκότες those who became (and remained) believers Ac 19:18; 21:20 (Just., D. 122, 2).—οἱ μέλλοντες πιστεύειν future believers 1 Cl 42:4; Hm 4, 3, 3a. οἱ νῦν πιστεύσαντες those who have just come to believe ibid. 4, 3, 3b.
    A special kind of this faith is the confidence that God or Christ is in a position to help suppliants out of their distress, have confidence (some of the passages already mentioned might just as well be classified here) abs. ὡς ἐπίστευσας γενηθήτω σοι may it be done to you in accordance with the confidence you have Mt 8:13. ὅσα ἂν αἰτήσητε πιστεύοντες whatever you pray for with confidence 21:22. Cp. Mk 5:36; 9:23f; Lk 8:50; 2 Cor 4:13a (Ps 115:1), b. W. ὅτι foll.: πιστεύετε ὅτι δύναμαι τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; do you have confidence that I am able to do this? Mt 9:28.—Mk 11:23.
    entrust τινί τι someth. to someone (X., Mem. 4, 4, 17; Plut., Mor. 519e; Athen. 8, 341a; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 25, 1; SIG2 845, 7, see for numerous other examples index VI p. 384b. Cp. Wsd 14:5; 1 Macc 8:16; 4 Macc 4:7; TestJob 11:11; Jos., Bell. 4, 492; Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 6) τὸ ἀληθινὸν τίς ὑμῖν πιστεύσει; Lk 16:11. αὐτῷ τοσούτων πιστευο̣μ̣έ̣ν̣ω̣ν̣ since so many (or so much) were ( was) entrusted to him AcPl Ha 7, 21 (connection uncertain). αὐτόν (so N. and Tdf.; v.l. ἑαυτόν) τινι trust oneself to someone (Brutus, Ep. 25; Plut., Mor. 181d ἀνδρὶ μᾶλλον ἀγαθῷ πιστεύσας ἑαυτὸν ἢ ὀχυρῷ τόπῳ=entrusting himself to a good man rather than to a stronghold; EpArist 270; Jos., Ant. 12, 396) J 2:24 (EStauffer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 281–99.—Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 39a οὐ τοῖς τυχοῦσι φίλοις ἑαυτὸν ἐπίστευσεν=he did not trust himself to casual friends).—Pass. πιστεύομαί τι (B-D-F §159, 4) I am entrusted with someth. (Pla., Ep. 1, 309a; Polyb. 8, 17, 5; 31, 26, 7; Diod S 20, 19, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 136 §568 ἃ ἐπιστεύθην; ins; pap [e.g. PLond I, 121, 608 p. 203]; Jos., Bell. 5, 567, Vi. 137; Ath. 24, 3. Cp. Esth 8:12e.—Dssm., LO 320f [LAE 379]). ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:2. πεπίστευμαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον Gal 2:7 (PGM 13, 140 ὁ ὑπό σου πάντα πιστευθείς; 446); cp. 1 Th 2:4; 1 Ti 1:11.—Tit 1:3. οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι 1 Cor 9:17; cp. Dg 7:1. S. also 7:2; IMg 6:1; IPhld 9:1ab. πιστεύομαί τι παρά τινος I am entrusted by someone with someth. (Polyb. 3, 69, 1; Jos., Bell. 1, 667): οἱ πιστευθέντες παρὰ θεοῦ ἔργον τοιοῦτο 1 Cl 43:1.
    be confident about, a unique use found in ὸ̔ς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα, someth. like the one is confident about eating anything Ro 14:2 (a combination of two ideas: ‘the pers. is so strong in the faith’ and: ‘the pers. is convinced that it is permissible to eat anything’; in brief: not cultically fussy. See Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.; but also B-D-F §397, 2). Another probability is the sense
    think/consider (possible), in Ro 14:2 perh. holds everything possible; cp. J 9:18 οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν they refused to entertain the possibility, and Ac 9:26. S. 4 above.—For lit. s. πίστις, end. DELG s.v. πείθομαι. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πιστεύω

  • 17 ἐπεί

    ἐπεί, Conj., both temporal and causal; also [full] ἐπειδή, [full] ἐπείτε.
    A OF TIME ( ἐπειδή is more freq. in this sense in Prose), after that, since, when, from Hom. downwds.:
    I with Ind.,
    1 of a definite occurrence in past time, mostly c. [tense] aor., ἐπεί π' εὔξαντο after they had prayed, Il.1.458;

    ἐπειδὴ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος καὶ κατέστη Ἀρταξέρξης

    after

    D.

    had died and A. had succeeded, X.An.1.1.3: rarely c. [tense] impf.,

    ἐπειδὴ εἱστιώμεθ' Ar.Nu. 1354

    ;

    ἐ. πόντον εἰσεβάλλομεν E.IT 260

    ;

    ἐ. ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος X.An.1.1.1

    : c. [tense] plpf., ἐπειδὴ ἐξηπάτησθε.. after you had been deceived.., D.18.42; but generally the [tense] aor. is found, the [tense] plpf. being used only for special emphasis: c. [tense] impf. to express an action not yet complete, ἐπεὶ ὑπηντίαζεν ἡ φάλαγξ καὶ ἡ σάλπιγξ ἐφθέγξατο after the phalanx began to advance and the trumpet had sounded, X.An.6.5.27.
    2 with implied reference to some later time, ἐ. or ἐπειδή, = ἐξ οὗ, from the time when, since, mostly c. [tense] aor.,

    πολλὰ πλάγχθη, ἐ. ἔπερσε Od.1.2

    ; ἐπείτε παρέλαβον τὸν θρόνον, τοῦτο ἐφρόντιζον ever since I came to the throne, I had this in mind, Hdt.7.8.

    ά; ἐπειδήπερ ὑπέστη Th.8.68

    ;

    δέκατον μὲν ἔτος τόδ' ἐ... ἦραν A.Ag. 40

    : sts. c. [tense] pres. (used in [tense] pf. sense) and [tense] pf., ἐ. δὲ φροῦδός ἐστι στρατός since the army is gone, S.Ant.15; ἐπείτε ὑπὸ τῷ Πέρσῃ εἰσί, πεπόνθασι τοιόνδε ever since they have been, now that they are.., Hdt.3.117.
    II with Subj., ἄν being always added in [dialect] Att. Prose, and ἄν or κε generally in Poetry: ἐπεί with ἄν becomes ἐπήν (so in Com., Ar.Lys. 1175,Av. 983), later ἐπάν (q.v.), [dialect] Ion.

    ἐπεάν Schwyzer 800

    (vi B.C.), Hdt.3.153, al.,

    ἐπήν Hp.Fract.6

    , al., and ἐπειδή with ἄν ἐπειδάν (q.v.); Hom. has ἐπεί κε, ἐπήν (once

    ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412

    ):
    1 referring to future time with [tense] fut. apodosis, τέκνα ἄξομεν.. ἐπὴν πτολίεθρον ἕλωμεν when we shall have taken the city, Il.4.238;

    ἐ. κ' ἀπὸ λαὸς ὄληται 11.764

    . cf. Od.17.23;

    ἐπεάν περ ἡμίονοι τέκωσι, τότε τὸ τεῖχος ἁλώσεσθαι Hdt.3.153

    ; ταῦτ', ἐπειδὰν περὶ τοῦ γένους εἴπω, τότ' ἐρῶ I will speak of this, when I have spoken.., D.57.16, cf. X.An.2.3.29;

    ἐ. ἂν σύ γε πότ μον ἐπίσπῃς Il.6.412

    ; χρὴ δέ, ὅταν μὲν τιθῆσθε τοὺς νόμους,.. σκοπεῖν, ἐπειδὰν δὲ θῆσθε, φυλάττειν whenever you are enacting your laws,.. and after you have enacted them.., D.21.34.
    2 of repeated action, with a [tense] pres. apodosis, whenever, when once,

    δαμνᾷ, ἐ. κε λίπῃ ὀστέα θυμός Od.11.221

    , cf. Il.9.409; ἐπειδὰν ἡ ἐκφορὰ ᾖ.. ἄγουσι whenever the burial takes place they bring, Th.2.34; ἐπειδὰν κρύψωσι γῇ.. λέγει when they have covered them with earth, ibid.: sts. without ἄν or κε in Poets,

    ἐ. ἂρ βλέφαρ' ἀμφικαλύψῃ Od.20.86

    ;

    ἐ. δὴ τόν γε δαμάσσεται.. ὀϊστός Il.11.478

    , cf. S.OC 1225 (lyr.), Ant. 1025.
    3 like A.1.2, δέκα ἡμερῶν ἐπειδὰν δόξῃ within ten days from the passing of the resolution, IG12.88.7.
    III with Opt. (without ἄν):
    1 referring to future time, ἐπειδὴ πρὸς τὸ φῶς ἔλθοι, ὁρᾶν οὐδ' ἂν ἓν δύνασθαι (sc. οὐκ οἴει); after he had come into the light.., Pl.R. 516a: Hom. sts. uses ἐπήν with opt. in same sense as ἐπεί, Il.24.227, Od.2.105 (codd.), etc.
    2 more freq. of repeated action, with a past apodosis,

    ἐ. ζεύξειεν.., δησάσκετο Il.24.14

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ δέ τι ἐμφάγοιεν, ἀνίσταντο X.An.4.5.9

    ;

    ἐ. πύθοιτο, ἐπῄνει Id.Cyr.5.3.55

    , cf. Th.8.38, Pl.Phd. 59d, Prt. 315b.
    3 in orat. obliq. after past tenses, representing a subj. in orat. rect., αὐτὸς δὲ ἐπεὶ διαβαίης, ἀπιέναι ἔφησθα (the direct form being ἐπὴν διαβῶ) X.An. 7.2.27, cf. 3.5.18, Cyr.1.4.21; after opt. in a final clause, ἐπορεύοντο,

    ὅπως ἐπειδὴ γένοιντο ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ.. ἴοιεν Th.7.80

    .
    4 by assimilation to opt. in principal clause,

    ἦ τ' ἂν.. νῦν μὲν ἀνώγοιμι πτολεμίζειν.. ἐπὴν τεισαίμεθα λώβην Il.19.208

    ;

    ὃς τὸ καταβρόξειεν ἐπεὶ κρητῆρι μιγείη Od.4.222

    .
    5 ἐπειδάν c. opt. is f.l. in some passages of early authors, as X.Cyr.1.3.11, D.30.6 (c. ind., Plb.13.7.8): found in later Gr., Agath.2.5, al., Zos.5.18.10.
    IV with Inf., only in orat. obliq., ἐπειδὴ δὲ κατὰ σχολὴν σκέψασθαι, κόπτεσθαι (sc. ἔφη) Pl.R. 619c, cf.Smp. 174d, Hdt.4.10, 7.150.
    V with other words:
    1 ἐ. τάχιστα as soon as, freq. separated by a word,

    ἐ. ἦλθε τάχιστα,.. ἀπέδοτο X.An.7.2.6

    ;

    ἐ. δὲ τάχιστα διέβη Id.Cyr.3.3.22

    ;

    ἐ. θᾶττον Arist.Pol. 1284a40

    ;

    ἐ. εὐθέως X.HG3.2.4

    ;

    ἐ... αὐτίκα Pi.N.1.35

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ τάχιστα Pl.Prt. 310c

    , D.27.16;

    ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα Hdt.8.144

    , X.An.3.1.9; rarely

    ἐπειδὴ θᾶττον D.37.41

    ;

    ἐπειδὰν θᾶττον Pl.Prt. 325c

    .
    b

    ἐ. τὰ πρῶτα Il.12.420

    ;

    ἐ. τὸ πρῶτον A.Ag. 1287

    .
    2 with emphatic Particles, ἐπεὶ ἄρα when then, in continuing a narrative, Il.6.426; ἐπεὶ οὖν when then, in resuming a narrative, 1.57, 3.4;

    ἐπεὶ ὦν Hdt.3.9

    ;

    ἐπεὶ γὰρ δή Id.9.90

    , etc.
    B CAUSAL ( ἐπεί more freq. in this sense in early Prose: ἐπειδή whereas is used in preambles of decrees, IG22.103, etc.;

    ἐπειδήπερ

    inasmuch as, Ev. Luc.

    1.1

    ), since, seeing that, freq. from Hom. downwards:
    1 with Ind. (after both present and past tenses),

    ἐ. οὐδὲ ἔοικε Il.1.119

    , cf. 153, 278, Pi.O.4.16, X.Mem.2.3.4;

    ἐπειδή Th.8.80

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις Pl.Prt. 335c

    ;

    νίκη δ' ἐπείπερ ἕσπετ', ἐμπέδως μένοι A.Ag. 854

    ; freq. with past tenses with

    ἄν, ἐπεὶ οὔποτ' ἂν στόλον ἐπλεύσατ' ἄν S.Ph. 1037

    ;

    ἐπεὶ οὔ κεν ἀνιδρωτί γ' ἐτελέσθη Il.15.228

    , cf. D. 18.49; οὐ γὰρ ἂν σθένοντά γε εἷλέν μ'· ἐπεὶ οὐδ' ἂν ὧδ' ἔχοντ' (sc. εἷλεν) S.Ph. 948: esp. in the sense, for otherwise.., Pi.O.9.29, S.OT 433, X.Mem.2.7.14, Herod.2.72, etc.: so c. [tense] fut., ἐξέστω δὲ μηδενὶ.. τεθῆναι.., ἐ. ἀποδώσει.. otherwise he shall pay.., Rev.Et.Anc.4.261 (near Smyrna): c. imper., ἐ. δίδαξον for teach me, S.El. 352, OC 969, cf. OT 390, Ar.V.73, Pl.Grg. 473e: with an interrog., ἐ. πῶς ἂν καλέσειας; for how would you call him? Ar.Nu. 688, cf. Pi.P.7.5, A.Ch. 214, S. Tr. 139 (lyr.);

    ὦ Ἀλκιβιάδη, ἐπειδὴ περὶ τίνος Ἀθηναῖοι διανοοῦνται βουλεύεσθαι, ἀνίστασαι συμβουλεύσων; Pl.Alc.1.106c

    .
    2 c. Opt.,

    ἐ. ἂν μάλα τοι σχεδὸν ἔλθοι Il.9.304

    , cf. S.Aj. 916; so after past tenses on the principle of orat. obliq., ἐπείπερ ἡγήσαιντο since (as they said) they believed, X.Mem.1.4.19.
    3 c. Inf. in orat. obliq.,

    ἐ. γιγνώσκειν γε αὐτά Pl.Prt. 353a

    , cf. Hdt.8.111, Th.2.93.
    4 in elliptical expressions, ἀδύνατός [εἰμι], ἐ. ἐβουλόμην ἂν οἷός τ' εἶναι I am unable (and yet I am sorry), for I should like to have the power, Pl.Prt. 335c; so εἶμι· ἐ. καὶ ταῦτ' ἂν ἴσως οὐκ ἀηδῶς σου ἤκουον ibid. (here the sense may be given by and yet, although, cf. ib. 333c, 317a, Ap. 19e, Smp. 187a, Arist.EN 1121a19); ἐ. ὅ γε ἀποθανὼν πελάτης τις ἦν ἐμός and yet (moreover) the murdered man was my own hired man, Pl. Euthphr.4c.
    b sts. after a voc., where 'listen' may be supplied,

    Ἕκτορ, ἐ. με κατ' αἶσαν ἐνείκεσας Il.3.59

    , cf. 13.68, Od.3.103, 211.
    5 with other Particles, ἐ. ἄρα, ἐ. ἂρ δή since then, Od.17.185; ἐ. γε (

    ἐπεί.. γε Il.1.352

    , Hes. Th. 171), more emphatic than ἐ., since indeed, E.Cyc. 181, Hipp. 955; ἐπειδή γε ib. 946, Pl.Phd. 77d, D.54.29; sts. separated,

    ἐπειδή.. γε S.El. 631

    , Pl.Phd. 87c;

    ἐ. γε δή Hdt.3.9

    , S.Ant. 923,

    ἐπειδή γε καί Th.6.18

    ; ἐ. ἦ since in truth,

    ἐ. ἦ πολὺ φέρτερόν ἐστι Il.1.169

    , cf. 156, Od.9.276; ἐπείπερ (

    ἐ... περ Il.13.447

    , Od.20.181) in Trag. and Prose, A.Ag. 822, S.OC75, Pl.Phd. 114d; ἐπειδήπερ in Com. and Prose, Ar.Ach. 437, 495, Nu. 1412, Th.6.18, Pl.R. 350e; ἐ. τοι since surely, S.OC 433;

    ἐ. νύ τοι Il.1.416

    ;

    ἐ. τοι καί E. Med. 677

    , Pl.R. 567e. [ἐ. sts. begins a verse in Hom., Il.22.379, Od. 4.13, 8.452, 21.25; sts. coalesces by synizesis with οὐ, οὐδέ, etc., S. Ph. 446, 948, etc.]

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπεί

  • 18 προσκυνέω

    προσκυνέω (κυνέω ‘to kiss’) impf. προσεκύνουν; fut. προσκυνήσω; 1 aor. προσεκύνησα (Trag., Hdt.+. Freq. used to designate the custom of prostrating oneself before persons and kissing their feet or the hem of their garment, the ground, etc.; the Persians did this in the presence of their deified king, and the Greeks before a divinity or someth. holy.) to express in attitude or gesture one’s complete dependence on or submission to a high authority figure, (fall down and) worship, do obeisance to, prostrate oneself before, do reverence to, welcome respectfully, in Attic Gk., and later (e.g. Appian, Mithrid. 104 §489), used w. the acc. (so Mt 4:10 and Lk 4:8 [Dt 6:13 v.l.]; J 4:22ab, 23b, 24a; Rv 9:20.—Gen 37:9; Ex 11:8; Judg 7:15 A; pseudepigr.; Philo; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 239, Ant. 2, 13; 7, 250; Just.; Tat.; Mel., P. 92, 690; Ath.); beside it the Koine uses the dat. (Phryn. p. 463 Lob.; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopl., diss. Munich 1913, 16; KWolf, Studien z. Sprache des Malalas II, diss. Munich 1912, 34; GKilpatrick in: Studies and Documents 29, ’67, 154–56; B-D-F §151, 2; Rob. 455; 476f), which the LXX (s. also JosAs; ApcMos 27:33) and our lit. prefer (s. also EpArist 135; Jos., Ant. 6, 55; Just., D. 30, 3; 78, 9; 88, 1.—Jos., Ant. 6, 154 πρ. τῷ θεῷ immediately after τὸν θεὸν πρ.). This reverence or worship is paid
    to human beings, but by this act they are to be recognized as belonging to a superhuman realm (Appian, Mithrid. 104 §489: Pompey; Galen, Protr. 5 p. 12, 2ff ed. WJohn: Socrates, Homer, Hippocrates, Plato): to a king (so Hdt. et al.; cp. 2 Km 18:28; 24:20; 3 Km 1:16, 53. On proskynesis in the Hellenistic ruler cults s. LTaylor, JHS 47, 1927, 53ff, The Divinity of the Rom. Emperor ’31, esp. 256–66; against her WTarn, Alexander the Great II, ’50, 347–73) ὁ δοῦλος προσεκύνει αὐτῷ Mt 18:26 (of a female slave toward her κύριος PGiss 17, 11f=Mitt-Wilck, I/2, 481; s. Jos., Ant. 2, 11); to Peter by Cornelius Ac 10:25 (cp. Apollonius [c. 197 A.D.] in Eus., HE 5, 18, 6).—The church at Philadelphia προσκυνήσουσιν ἐνώπιον τῶν ποδῶν σου Rv 3:9 (on πρ. ἐνώπιόν τινος cp. Ps 21:28; 85:9; Is 66:23; TestAbr B 4 p. 108, 17 [Stone 64, 17]).—Jesus, who is rendered homage as Messianic king and helper: Mt 2:2, 8, 11.—8:2; 9:18; 14:33; 15:25; J 9:38.—Mt 20:20; GJs 20:4 (codd.); 21:1, 2 (codd.). A man possessed by an unclean spirit asks a favor of him Mk 5:6. Mock worship on the part of soldiers 15:19 (στέφανος 1). S. also bε below.
    to transcendent beings (God: Aeschyl. et al.; X., An. 3, 2, 9; 13; Pla., Rep. 3, 398a; Polyb. 18, 37, 10; Plut., Pomp. 626 [14, 4]; Lucian, Pisc. 21 τῇ θεῷ; PGM 4, 649. Of various divinities in the ins [s. OGI II 700a index VIII; Sb 7911ff]; PFlor 332, 11 θεούς; LXX; Philo, Gig. 54 τὸν θεόν al.; Jos., Ant. 6, 154; 20, 164 al.; Theoph. Ant. 1, 11 [p. 82, 3]).
    α. of deity in monotheistic cult (Christians, Judeans, Samaritans) κύριον τὸν θεόν σου προσκυνήσεις (Dt 6:13 v.l.) Mt 4:10; Lk 4:8. πρ. τῷ πατρί J 4:21, 23a; cp. 23b. τῷ θεῷ (Jos., Ant. 6, 55; 9, 267; cp. Orig., C. Cels. 5, 11, 38 [w. λατρεύειν]) Rv 19:4 (w. πίπτειν), 10b; 22:9. See Hb 1:6 (Dt 32:43 LXX). τῷ ζῶντι Rv 4:10. τῷ ποιήσαντι τὸν οὐρανόν 14:7. πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον προσκυνήσει τῷ θεῷ he will fall down and worship God (cp. 2 Km 9:6 of obeisance before David) 1 Cor 14:25; cp. Rv 7:11; 11:16. ἐνώπιόν σου (s. the Ps. reff. in a above) 15:4. Abs. (SIG 1173, 2; PTebt 416, 7; LXX) J 4:20ab, 24ab; Ac 8:27. Used w. ἀναβαίνειν (UPZ 62, 33 [161 B.C.] ἐὰν ἀναβῶ κἀγὼ προσκυνῆσαι; Jos., Ant. 20, 164) J 12:20; Ac 24:11; cp. Rv 11:1. W. πίπτειν (s. Jos., Ant. 8, 119) Rv 5:14. προσεκύνησεν ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον τῆς ῥάβδου αὐτοῦ he bowed in worship (or prayed) over the head of his staff Hb 11:21 (Gen 47:31).
    β. of image worship in polytheistic cult (LXX; Ar. 3, 2; Just.; Ath. 15, 1 τὰ ἀγάλματα) προσκυνεῖν τοῖς νεκροῖς θεοῖς 2 Cl 3:1 or λίθους καὶ ξύλα κτλ. 1:6 (cp. EpArist 135 … οἷς πρ.). See Ac 7:43; Dg 2:5. τὰ ὑφʼ ὑμῶν προσκυνούμενα the things that are worshiped by you 2:4. Abs., w. θύειν MPol 12:2.
    γ. the devil and Satanic beings (the eschatological opponent Iren. 5, 28, 2) Mt 4:9; Lk 4:7 (on πρ. ἐνώπιον ἐμοῦ s. α above). τὰ δαιμόνια Rv 9:20. τῷ δράκοντι 13:4a; τῷ θηρίῳ 13:4b. τὸ θηρίον vss. 8 (αὐτόν), 12; 20:4. τῇ εἰκόνι (Da 3:5 al.) τοῦ θηρίου 13:15; cp. 16:2; 19:20. τὸ θηρίον καὶ τ. εἰκόνα αὐτοῦ 14:9, 11. See θηρίον 1b; also PTouilleux, L’Apocalypse et les cultes de Domitien et de Cybèle ’35.
    δ. angels (TestAbr A 3 p. 79, 28 [Stone p. 6]) Rv 22:8; cp. 19:10a.
    ε. The risen Lord is esp. the object of worship: Mt 28:9, 17; Lk 24:52 P75 et al. Likewise the exalted Christ MPol 17:3. See also a above, end.—Lit. s.v. προσεύχομαι, end; Bolkestein [δεισιδαιμονία, end] 23ff; JHorst, Proskynein: Z. Anbetung im Urchristentum nach ihrer religionsgesch. Eigenart ’32; Berthe MMarti, Proskynesis and adorare: Language 12, ’36, 272–82; BReicke, Some Reflections on Worship in the NT: TWManson mem. vol. ’59, 194–209.—B. 1469; Kl. Pauly IV 1189. New Docs 2, 68; 3, 77–78; 4, 61f. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > προσκυνέω

  • 19 τέλος

    τέλος, εος, τό, ([etym.] τέλλομαι, τέλλω)
    A coming to pass, performance, consummation,

    εἰ γὰρ ἐπ' ἀρῇσιν τ. ἡμετέρῃσι γένοιτο Od.17.496

    ;

    ἐν [θεοῖς] τ. ἐστὶν ὁμῶς ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669

    ; δίκη δ' ὑπὲρ ὕβριος ἴσχει ἐς τ. ἐξελθοῦσα issuing in fulfilment, execution, ib. 218;

    καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης κατὰ νόμον τ. ἐχούσης PEleph.1.12

    (iv B.C.), cf. IG12(7).67.48 (Arcesine, iv/iii B.C.);

    καθήκει νῦν [τὰν γνώμαν] ἐπὶ τέλος ἀχθῆμεν SIG793.7

    (Halasarna, i A.D.); ἔλπομαι μέν, ἐν θεῷ γε μὰν τ. Pi.O.13.105, cf. N.8.45, 10.29, D.18.193;

    ἢν θεὸς ἀγαθὸν τ. διδῷ αὐτῷ X.Cyr.3.2.29

    ;

    ἐν πείρᾳ τ. διαφαίνεται Pi.N.3.70

    ;

    ψευστήσεις, οὐδ' αὖτε τ. μύθῳ ἐπιθήσεις Il.19.107

    , cf. Isoc.5.71, 6.77; result,

    τ. δ' οὔ πώ τι πέφανται Il.2.122

    ;

    εἵως κε τ. πολέμοιο κιχείω 3.291

    ;

    ἐν γὰρ χερσὶ τ. πολέμου 16.630

    ; ἶσον τείνειεν πολέμου τ. 20. 101, cf. Hes.Th. 638 (but ἢ πολέμοιο ἢ λοιμοῖο τ. ποτιδέγμενοι the coming to pass (outbreak) of.., A.R.4.1282); τί μὰν ἀφήσει τ.; S. OC 1468 (lyr.); τί ἔσται τὸ τ. τῶν γιγνομένων τούτων ἐμοί; Hdt.1.155, cf. Isoc.6.50; ἀποίητον.. θέμεν ἔργων τ. undo things done, Pi.O.2.17; ὁδοῦ τ. S.OC 1400; φόνου τ. A.R.1.834;

    τοῦ δ' ὔμμι τέλος κρηῆναι ἔοικεν Id.3.172

    ; τῷ τ. πίστιν φέρων the outcome, S.El. 735; Ζεὺς πάντων ἐφορᾷ τ. Sol.13.17;

    ἀκόλουθον τὸ τ. ἐξέβη τοῦ κινδύνου ταῖς ἐπιβολαῖς Plb.4.11.9

    ;

    ἀμφίδοξα τὰ τ. τῶν κινδύνων αὐτοῖς ἀπέβαινε Id.18.28.11

    , cf. 18.32.12, 3.5.7;

    τ. τοιόνδε ἐγένετο τῆς μάχης Hdt. 9.22

    , cf. Plb.1.61.2; μάχης.. κεκύρωται τ. A.Ch. 874; διὰ μάχης ἥξω τέλους, = διὰ μάχης ἥξω, Id.Supp. 475; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα μαχᾶν τάμνειν τ. to seek to determine the issue of the battles in both directions, Pi.O.13.57; more generally, event,

    οὐ γὰρ ἔγωγέ τί φημι τ. χαριέστερον εἶναι ἢ ὅτε.. Od.9.5

    : in concrete sense, result, product,

    τ. εὐπεψίας αἱματικῆς πιμελὴ καὶ στέαρ Arist.PA 672a4

    , cf. GA 725b8.
    2 in contexts like Hes.Op. 669, Il.16.630 (v. supr.), τ. can be understood as power of deciding, supreme power, and so we have

    τ. μὲν Ζεὺς ἔχει.. πάντων ὅσ' ἐστί Semon.1.1

    ;

    ἐν δ' ἐμοὶ τ. αὐτοῖν γένοιτο τῆσδε τῆς μάχης πέρι S.OC 423

    ; [

    Ἄπολλον].. ὅθεν πολεμόκραντον ἁγνὸν, τ. ἐν μάχᾳ A.Th. 162

    (lyr.);

    τελέων τελειότατον κράτος, ὄλβιε Ζεῦ Id.Supp. 525

    (lyr.);

    τ. ἔχει δαίμων βροτοῖς, τ. ὅπᾳ θέλει E.Or. 1545

    (lyr.);

    τ. δ' ἐφ' ἡμῖν, εἴτε.. εἴτε.. Id.Hel. 887

    ; καὶ τοῖσ' (sc. ἰητροῖς) οὐδὲν ἔπεστι τ. they have no power or efficacy, Sol.13.58: and in the civil sphere, τ. ἔχειν, of persons, to have the power to ratify, IG12.57.25, Foed. ap. Th.4.118, Arist.Pol. 1322b13; ὅ τι ἂν δόξῃ τοῖς πλείοσι τοῦτ' εἶναι τ. the decision of the majority must be final, ib. 1317b6; κύριος ἔστω ἐπιβάλλειν κατὰ τὸ τ. shall have authority to inflict a fine up to the limit of his powers, Lexap.D.43.75;

    κατὰ τὸ τ. ζημιοῦσθαι Is.4.11

    ; τοῖς κατ' ἐμπορίαν παραγιγνομένοις μηδὲν ἔστω τ. πλὴν ἐπὶ κήρυκι ἢ γραμματεῖ Foed. ap. Plb.3.22.8; τ. ἔχειν, of things, to have decisive or final authority,

    σφῷν μὲν ἐντολὴ Διὸς ἔχει τ. δή A.Pr. 13

    ; ἡ.. τούτου αἰτίασις οὐκ ἔχει τ. has no validity, Antipho 5.89; πρὶν τ. τι αὐτῶν ἔχειν before any of the terms had validity, i.e. had been ratified, Th.5.41, cf. D.35.27; τοῦ ζῆν καὶ μὴ ζῆν τὸ τ. ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ ἀναπνεῖν the decisive difference between.., Arist.Resp. 480b19.
    3 magistracy, office,

    τ. δωδεκάμηνον Pi.N.11.9

    ( δυω- codd.); οἱ ἐν τ. men in office, magistrates, S.Aj. 1352, Ph. 385, Th.3.36; ἔξω τῶν βασιλέων καὶ τῶν μάλιστα ἐν τ. Id.1.10, cf. 6.88;

    οἱ ἐν τέλεϊ ἐόντες Hdt.3.18

    , 9.106; poet.,

    οἱ ἐν τέλει βεβῶτες S.Ant.67

    ; οἱ τὰ τ. ἔχοντες Foed. ap. Th.5.47;

    ὂρ μέγιστον τ. ἔχοι Schwyzer409.3

    (Elis, V B.C.);

    τοὺς.. τὸ ὁροφυλακικὸν τ. ἔχοντας SIG633.94

    (Milet., ii B.C.); τὸ τ. the government,

    τοιαῦτ' ἔδοξε τῷδε Καδμείων τέλει A.Th. 1030

    ; τὰ τ. the magistrates, Th. (with a masc. part. and pl. (v.l.) verb) 1.58, 4.15, X.An.2.6.4.
    4 decision, doom,

    Ζεὺς.. οἶδε, ὁπποτέρῳ θανάτοιο τ. πεπρωμένον ἐστί Il.3.309

    ;

    Κῆρες δὲ παρεστήκασι.., ἡ μὲν ἔχουσα τ. γήραος ἀργαλέου, ἡ δ' ἑτέρη θανάτοιο Mimn.2.6

    ; μήτηρ.. μέ φησι διχθαδίας Κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλος δέ (or τέλοσδε) Il.9.411, cf. 13.602; ἐξέφυγον θανάτου τ. Archil.6.3;

    τ. θανάτου ἀλεείνων Od.5.326

    ;

    τ. θανάτοιο κάλυψεν Il.5.553

    ;

    οὐδέ κέ μ' ὦκα τ. θανάτοιο κιχείη 9.416

    , cf. 11.451;

    ἡμετέρου θανάτοιο κακὸν τ., οἷον ἐτύχθη Od.24.124

    , cf. A.Th. 906 (lyr.):—judicial decision,

    ἀμμενῶ τ. δίκης Id.Eu. 243

    ; κύριον μένει τ. ib. 544 (lyr.); οὐκ ἔχουσα τῆς δίκης τ. not having authority to decide the case, ib. 729; ἦ κἀπ' ἐμοὶ τρέποιτ' ἂν αἰτίας τ.; will you submit the decision of this case to me? ib. 434;

    τὸ τ. κρίνειν Pl.Lg. 768b

    ; τ. ἐπιθέτω τῇ δίκῃ ib. 767a, cf. 761e, 957b; decision of an assembly, A. Supp. 603, 624; of a king, Id.Ag. 934; ἐξαιτράπης ἐὼν Ἰωνίης, τ. ἐποίησε τὴν γῆν εἶναι Μιλησίων prob. in SIG134b30 (Milet., iv B.C.); ὥς τοι ἐγὼ μύθου τ. ἐν φρεσὶ θείω the summing up or crux of the matter, Il.16.83.
    5 something done or ordered to be done, task, service, duty, γνῶ.. ὅ οἱ οὔ τι τ. κατὰ καίριον ἦλθεν on no fatal errand, Il.11.439 (nisi leg. κατακαίριον)

    ; οὐδὲ μακύνων τ. οὐδέν Pi.P.4.286

    ; ὅσοις τοῦτ' ἐπέσταλται τ. A.Eu. 743, cf. Ag. 908; μ' Ἀπόλλων τῷδ' ἐπέστησεν τέλει ib. 1202, cf. Ch. 760; ἄυπνα ὀμμάτων τέλη the wakeful duties (or services) of the eyes, E.Supp. 1137 (lyr.); ἀμφοτερᾶν τοι χαρίτων.. ζεύξω τ. the rendering of both services, Pi.I.1.6; αἰτουμένῳ μοι κοῦφον εἰ δοίης τ. a small service or favour, A.Th. 260;

    ἡξῶ ναὶ τὸν Πᾶνα κακὸν τ. αὐτίκα δωσῶν Theoc.4.47

    ; obligation to render a service or payment, ὅτε δὴ μισθοῖο τ. πολυγηθέες ὧραι ἐξέφερον the Payment(-day) of the wage, Il.21.450;

    οἱ δ' ἐλάττω τῶν ἱκανῶν κεκτημένοι, τὴν ἀναγκαίαν ἀτέλειαν ἔχοντες, ἔξω τοῦ τ. εἰσὶ τούτου D.20.19

    , cf. Poll.8.156; ἐν τέλει μαθεῖν to be taught for a fee, Id.4.46.
    6 pl., services or offerings due to the gods,

    δαίμοσιν θῦσαι θέλουσα πελανόν, ὧν τέλη τάδε A.Pers. 204

    ;

    ἔνθ' ὁρίζεται βωμοὺς τ. τ' ἔγκαρπα Κηναίῳ Διί S.Tr. 238

    ; ἔλιπον Ζηνὶ τροπαίῳ πάγχαλκα τ. Id.Ant. 143 (anap.);

    γῇ δὲ τῇδε Σισύφου σεμνὴν ἑορτὴν καὶ τέλη προσάψομεν E.Med. 1382

    ;

    θεοῖσι μικρὰ θύοντες τέλη Id.Fr.327.6

    ; of the Eleusinian mysteries, οὗ πότνιαι σεμνὰ τιθηνοῦνται τ. S.OC 1050 (lyr.), cf. Fr. 837;

    σεμνῶν ἐς ὄψιν καὶ τ. μυστηρίων E.Hipp.25

    ; called μεγάλα τ., Pl.R. 560e; rarely in sg., τοῦδε μυστικοῦ τέλους this mystic rite, A.Fr. 387; of the marriage rite,

    τ. γάμοιο Od.20.74

    , cf.A.R.4.1202, AP6.276 (Antip.); γαμήλιον τ. A.Eu. 835; τὰ νυμφικὰ τ. S.Ant. 1241;

    τ. ὁ γάμος ἐκαλεῖτο Poll.3.38

    , cf. Paus.Gr.Fr.306, Sch.Ar.Th. 982, Stob.2.7.3a.
    7 service rendered by a citizen in the Solonian constitution to the state, also his rating according to this service, θητικοῦ ἀντὶ τέλους ἱππάδ' ἀμειψάμενος Epigr. ap. Arist.Ath.7.4; τιμήματι διεῖλεν εἰς τέτταρα τ. four ratings or classes, ib.7.3; later, τὸ τῶν ἱππέων τ., Lat. ordo equester, D.C.48.45, al.
    8 dues exacted by the state, Ar.V. 658 (pl.), Pl.R. 425d (pl.); ἀγορᾶς τ. a market- toll, Ar.Ach. 896; πορνικὸν τ. Aeschin.1.119; τ. πρίασθαι, πωλεῖν, farm a tax or let it, D.24.144, Aeschin. l.c.; ἐκλέγειν. πράττειν, levy it, D.l.c., Alex.263.3, Aeschin.3.113; τελεῖν pay a tax or duty, Pl.Lg. 847b; εἰ τὰ τ. τελεῖ, ποῖον τ. τελεῖ, questions put to candidates at Athens, Din.2.17, Arist.Ath.7.4;

    τέλη κατατίθησιν Antipho 5.77

    ;

    καταβαλεῖν And.1.93

    ; freq. in Inscrr., IG12.46.12, al., SIG135.14 (Olynthus, iv B.C.), al., and Papyri, τὸ ὡρισμένον τῆς αἰτήσεως τ., etc., POxy.1473.30 (iii A.D.), cf. PCair.Zen.240.7 (iii B.C.), etc.: metaph., τέλη λύειν, v. λύω v. 2.
    9 financial means, expenditure, usu. in dat. pl., ὃς ἂν τοῖς ἰδίοις τ. μὴ ἑαυτὸν μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν πόλιν ὠφελῇ by the use of his own means, Th.6.16; κακῶς ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς ποιούντων τέλεσι τοῖς οἰκείοις if we harm ourselves at our own expense, Id.4.60;

    ἀναγραψάτω.. τέλεσι τοῖς Λεωνίδου IG 12.56.22

    , cf. 94.14, al.;

    Χερρόνησον τοῖς αὑτοῦ τ. διορύξει D.6.30

    ;

    δημοσίοις τέλεσι Plu.Phoc.38

    : in nom. sg., μάτην γὰρ οἴκῳ σὸν τόδ' ἐκβαίη τ. E.Fr. 639.
    10 a military station or post with defined duties (cf. signf. 5), ἐλθεῖν εἰς φυλάκων ἱερὸν τ. Il.10.56; αἶψα δ' ἐπὶ Θρῃκῶν ἀνδρῶν τ. ἷξον ἰόντες ib. 470; δόρπον ἔπειθ' ἑλόμεσθα κατὰ στρατὸν ἐν τελέεσσιν at our posts, in the ranks, 11.730, cf. 18.298; later, military unit, division, squadron,

    τέλει ἑνὶ τῶν ἱππέων Th.2.22

    , cf. 4.96;

    πελταστῶν τέλη E.Rh. 311

    ;

    κατὰ τέλεα Hdt.1.103

    , 7.87, al.;

    κατὰ τέλη Th.6.42

    , Plb.11.11.6, cf. 11.15.2, Polyaen.2.1.17; in the Roman army, legion, J.AJ14.16.2, BJ1.17.9, Plu.Ant.18.56, App.BC5.87, al.
    b a force of 2048 infantry, = μεραρχία, Ascl. Tact.2.10, Arr.Tact.10.5, Ael.Tact.9.7.
    c a force of 2048 cavalry, Ascl.Tact.7.11, Arr.Tact.18.4, Ael.Tact.20.2.
    II δίρρυμά τε καὶ τρίρρυμα τέλη troops or columns of.. chariots, A.Pers.47 (anap.); of ships,

    τρία τ. ποιήσαντες τῶν νεῶν Th.1.48

    : also ὀρνίθων τέλεα flocks of birds, v.l. for γένεα, Hdt.2.64;

    τ. ἀθανάτων A.Fr. 151

    (anap.).
    12 a territorial division, Στρατικὸν τ. SIG421.44 (Acarnania, iii B.C.); Κορωνείων τὸ τ. Supp.Epigr.3.354 (Thebes, iii B.C.); τὸ Λοκρικὸν τ. GDI2070 (Delph., ii B.C.).
    II degree of completion or attainment,

    τόσσον μὲν ἔχον τ., οὔατα δ' οὔ πω.. προσέκειτο Il.18.378

    ; degree of maturity, age,

    ἐπὴν δὴ τοῦτο τ. παραμείψεται ὥρης Mimn.2.9

    ;

    ἥβης πρὶν τ. ἄκρον ἰδεῖν Simon.123

    ;

    ἥβης τ. μολόντας E.Med. 920

    ; εἰς ἀνδρὸς τ. ἰέναι man's estate, Pl.Mx. 249a;

    εἰς πρεσβύτου τ. ἀφικομένοις Id.Epin. 992d

    ;

    τὸ τῶν παίδων τ. ἄδηλον οἷ τελευτᾷ κακίας καὶ ἀρετῆς ψυχῆς τε πέρι καὶ σώματος Id.Smp. 181e

    ;

    οὐδὲ γήρως ἔβας τ. σὺν τᾷδε E.Alc. 413

    (lyr.).
    b a length of time (or space), term, course, ἀρετάς, αἷσι Κλεωνυμίδαι θάλλοντες αἰεὶ σὺν θεῷ θνατὸν διέρχονται βιότου τ. Pi.I.4(3).5(23); so perh. in E.Hipp.87 (v. infr. 3), and in διὰ τέλους (v. infr. 2 c).
    2 state of completion or maturity, τ. λαβεῖν, ἔχειν, of plants or animals, to attain maturity, Pl.Phdr. 276b, Lg. 834c, cf. 899e: hence, completion, end, finish, τ. ἐπιθεῖναι τῷ λόγῳ complete it, Id.Smp. 186a, cf. Prt. 348a; ὃ πᾶσι τοῖς προτέροις ἐπ έθηκε τ. as a finish to all his former acts, D.18.140;

    τὸ τ. τῆς σκηνῆς ἐποιήσαντο X.Cyr.2.3.24

    ;

    ταύτης.. τῆς ἡμέρας τοῦτο τὸ τ. ἐγένετο Id.An.1.10.18

    ; τ. λαβεῖν to be completed, Pl.R. 501e, Isoc.4.5;

    τ. ἔχειν Pl.Lg. 772c

    ; οὐ τ. ἵκεο μύθων didst not reach the end of thy speech, Il.9.56;

    ἐπὶ τέλους τοῦ δρόμου Pl.R. 613d

    ;

    μέχρι τοῦ τὸ προκείμενον ἐπὶ τέλος ἀχθῆναι PTeb.14.8

    (ii B.C.);

    ἑκάστων πρὸς τέλος ἀχθέντων UPZ108.29

    (ii B.C.), cf. BGU1816.11 (i B.C.);

    ἡ εἰκοστὴ τοῦ νοσήματος ἡμέρα τ. μὲν τριῶν ἑβδομάδων, ἓξ δὲ τετράδων Gal.18(2).234

    :—freq. in Adverbial phrases:
    a τέλος at last,

    ὥστε τ. ἡσυχίαν ἦγον Th.2.100

    , cf. 5.46; but most freq. at the beginning of the clause,

    μάχης δὲ καρτερῆς γενομένης, τέλος οὐδέτεροι νικήσαντες διέστησαν Hdt.1.76

    , cf.4.131, al.;

    τέλος δέ Id.1.36

    , Thgn. 1294, etc.; ἀλλὰ τ. Hdt.6.137;

    τ. μέντοι Id.5.89

    , X.HG5.4.30;

    τ. γε μέντοι S.Ant. 233

    ; καὶ τ. Hdt.4.154, Th.1.109; τό γε τ. Pl.Lg. 740e.
    b < ἐς τ. in the end, in the long run,

    πάντως ἐς τ. ἐξεφάνη Sol.13.28

    , cf. Hdt.9.37; εἰς τ. S.Ph. 409;

    θνητῶν δ' εἰς τ. ὄλβιος οὐδείς E.IA 161

    (anap.), cf. Hdt.3.40; ὁρῶντες τὴν Λιβύην εἰς τ. ἀβλαβῆ διαμένουσαν altogether, completely, Plb.1.20.7, cf. PTeb.38.11 (ii B.C.), OGI90.12 (Rosetta, ii B.C.), PSI10.1120.5 (i B.C./i A.D.); ἐς τ. ἄνυε μοίρας dub. l. in Theoc.1.93.
    c διὰ τέλους (orig. perh. from signf. 1.1 or 5, or 11.1b, through the (whole) performance or time), through to the end, completely, A.Pr. 275, S.Aj. 685, E.Supp. 270, Isoc.5.24, 8.17, 19.4; throughout, all the time, always, Antipho 5.42, Timocl.8.5, Hegesipp.Com.2.3; so

    διὰ τέλεος Hp.Acut.46

    (= διὰ παντὸς καὶ ἀεί acc. to Gal.15.618);

    διὰ τέλους ἀεί Pl.Phlb. 36e

    ; permanently, for good, τοῦ ἀφεθῆναί σε διὰ τ. PPetr.2p.45 (iii B.C.).
    e τέλει perh. in the end, S.OT 198 (lyr.).
    3 esp. τ. ἔχειν βίου to have reached the end of life, to be dead, Pl.Lg. 801e;

    ἐμοὶ μὲν τοῦ βίου τὸ τ. ἤδη πάρεστιν X.Cyr.8.7.6

    ;

    πᾶσίν ἐστιν ἀνθρώποις τ. τοῦ βίου θάνατος D.57.27

    ;

    εἰς τ. τοῦ ζῆν ἀφικνεῖσθαι S.OC 1530

    : less freq. abs., death,

    ἐλπίς ἐστι νύκτερον τ. μολεῖν A.Th. 367

    (lyr.);

    οἱ νεηνίαι οὐκέτι ἀνέστησαν ἀλλ' ἐν τέλεϊ τούτῳ ἔσχοντο Hdt.1.31

    ; ἔχει τὸ κάλλιστον τ. X.Cyr.7.3.11; ἔχει τ., = τετελεύτηκε, Laconian phrase acc. to Hsch.;

    τῶν ἤδη τ. ἐχόντων Pl.Lg. 717e

    , cf. 772c, BGU1857.7 (i B.C.); reversely,

    τ. ἔχει τινά Pl.Lg. 740c

    ;

    οἷόν σε βίου τ. εἷλε E.Rh. 735

    (anap.):—but ὀλβίως ἔλυσεν τὸ τ. βίου has paid life's toll (cf. supr.1.8), S.OC 1720 (lyr.); τὸ τ. ὁ χρόνος ἀπαιτεῖ Poet. in Mus.Script.p.452 von Jan; also

    τ. δὲ κάμψαιμ' ὥσπερ ἠρξάμην βίου E.Hipp.87

    (cf. supr. 11.1b); πρὶν ἂν πέλας (v.l. τέλος)

    γραμμῆς ἵκηται καὶ τ. κάμψῃ βίου Id.El. 955

    -6.
    4 end, cessation, ὡς δὲ πρὸς τ. γόων ἀφίκοντ' S.OC 1621; πῶς τροχηλάτου μανίας ἂν ἔλθοιμ' ἐς τ. πόνων τ' ἐμῶν; E.IT83; ὅταν δὴ πημάτων λάβῃ τ. Id.Hel. 534;

    τ. δέχει δὴ τῶν ἐμῶν προσφθεγμά των Id.Hec. 413

    ;

    ἡ μὲν οὖν ἐπανάστασις.. τοῦτο τὸ τ. ἔσχεν Hell.Oxy.10.3

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ οὐχ οἷόν τε εἰς ἄπειρον, τ. ἔσται πάσης φορᾶς Arist.Metaph.

    1074a30.
    5 end of a word, A.D.Pron.12.25, al.; of a sentence,

    ἐπὶ τέλει πρόσκειται Sor.1.43

    , cf. Gal.15.20; of a chapter or book,

    ἐπὶ τέλει ἀναλυθήσεται Archim.Sph.Cyl.2.4

    , cf. Gal.15.10;

    πρὸς τῷ τ. ῥηθήσεται Pl.Lg. 957b

    ;

    πρὸς τῷ τ. τοῦ ἐντέρου Arist.PA 675a16

    ; ἀπὸ τέλους τοῦ σταδίου, opp. ἀπὸ μέσου, Id.Ph. 239b34 (cf. infr. 111.2).
    III achievement, attainment,

    τηλοῦ ἐμοὶ νόστοιο τ. γλυκεροῖο γενέσθαι Od.22.323

    , cf. Pi.N.3.25;

    τ. δὲ τῆς ἀπαλλαγῆς τοῦ Αἰθίοπος ὧδε ἔλεγον γενέσθαι Hdt.2.139

    ; πῶς ἂν καὶ τοῦτο τοῦ τ. τυγχάνοι, i.e. might be achieved, Gem.8.36.
    2 winning-post, goal in a race,

    πρὸς τ. ὀρνύμενον B.5.45

    ; in a contest,

    ἔστιν δ' ἀφάνεια τύχας καὶ μαρναμένων, πρὶν τ. ἄκρον ἱκέσθαι Pi.I.4(3).32(50)

    ; εἰς τ. ἐλθεῖν, of runners in a race, Pl.R. 613c.
    b prize, ἔφερε πυγμᾶς τ. Pi.O.10(11).67; οὐ γὰρ ἦν πενταέθλιον ἀλλ' ἐφ' ἑκάστῳ ἔργματι κεῖτο τ. Id.I.1.27;

    ποτὶ γραμμᾷ μὲν αὐτὰν στᾶσεκοσμήσαις, τ. ἔμμεν ἄκρον Id.P.9.118

    (perh. 'to be the winning post and prize');

    κρίνεις τ. ἀρετᾶς B.10.6

    : metaph.,

    οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν τίνι τοῦτο Μοῖρα τ. ἔμπεδον ὤρεξε Pi.N.7.57

    .
    3 Philos., full realization, highest point. ideal, ἅπτεσθαι τοῦ τ. Pl.Smp. 211b; πρὸς τ. ἰὼν τῶν ἐρωτικῶν ib. 210e;

    πρὸς τ. ἀρετῆς ἐλθόντα Id.Clit. 410e

    , cf. R. 613c.
    b the end or purpose of action,

    τ. εἶναι ἁπασῶν τῶν πράξεων τὸ ἀγαθόν Id.Grg. 499e

    ; freq. in Arist., EN 1094a18, al.: hence, the final cause, = τὸ οὗ ἕνεκα, Id.Metaph. 994b9, 996a26, al.; hence simply = τὸ ἀγαθόν, the chief good, Id.EN 1097a21, Zeno Stoic.1.45, etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τέλος

  • 20 ἐσθίω

    ἐσθίω (Hom.+) and, mainly in the ptc., ἔσθω (Hom., also in other poets, rare in prose [Plut., Mor. p. 101d]; Coan ins, III B.C.: RHerzog, ARW 10, 1907, 400ff; 23; 27; 42; POslo 153, 15 [beg. II A.D.]; PGiss 80, 5; ostraca [BGU 1507, 14; 1508, 3; 4: III B.C.]; LXX; En 98:11 [?]. ἔσθων Lev 17:14; 1 Km 14:30; Sir 20:17; Mk 1:6; Lk 7:33f, 10:7 [the three last v.l.]; μὴ ἔσθετε Lev 19:26. ὅταν ἔσθητε Num 15:19. ἵνα ἔσθητε Lk 22:30. B-D-F §101; W-S. §15; Mlt-H. 238; Schwyzer, I 704 n. 1). Impf. ἤσθιον; fut. ἔδομαι LXX (Mel, P. 12, 80; 13, 83; 93, 697; 1 Cl 39:9; 57:6); 2 aor. ἔφαγον, w. extension of 1 aor. endings (B-D-F §84, 2; Rob. 333; cp. Schwyzer I 753f): 3 pl. ἐφάγοσαν Ps 77:29, 1 pl. ἐφάγαμεν 2 Km 19:43; fut. φάγομαι (B-D-F §74, 2; Mlt-H. 238), 2 sing. φάγεσαι Lk 17:8; Ruth 2:14 (W-S. §13, 6 and 17; B-D-F §87; Mlt-H. 198); pf. pass. ptc. acc. ἐδηδεμένους (Ath., R. 52, 20); pres. 3 sg. ἔσθεται Lev 11:34; Dt 12:22.
    to take someth. in through the mouth, usually solids, but also liquids, eat.
    w. acc. of thing (Hom. et al.) τί φάγωσιν (after neg.) anything to eat Mt 15:32; Mk 6:36; 8:1f; cp. Mt 6:25, 31; Lk 12:22 (s. Epict. 1, 9, 8; 19). τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς προθέσεως the consecrated bread Mt 12:4; Mk 2:26; Lk 6:4. Locusts and wild honey Mk 1:6. Manna (Ps 77:24) J 6:31, 49 (Just., D. 20, 4). Vegetables Ro 14:2b. Meat 14:21; 1 Cor 8:13; GEb 308, 31f; 34f (τὰς σάρκας αὐτῶν ‘one’s own flesh’ 4 [6] Esdr; POxy 1010). τὰ εἰδωλόθυτα 1 Cor 8:10; cp. vs. 7; Rv 2:14, 20 (Just., D. 34, 8; 35, 1). τὰς θυσίας (Sir 45:21; Ps 105:28) 1 Cor 10:18. τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ food from the temple 9:13. τὴν σάρκα τ. υἱοῦ τ. ἀνθρώπου J 6:53 (which passage many interpret as referring to the Eucharist while others explain it as speaking of receiving Christ spiritually through faith). πάντα all kinds of food Ro 14:2a (μὴ πάντα ἐσθίοντες Just., 20, 3). τὰ παρατιθέμενα the food that is set before (one) Lk 10:8; 1 Cor 10:27. τὸ ἐν μακέλλῳ πωλούμενον 10:25. τὸ βιβλαρίδιον Rv 10:10 (cp. Ezk 2:8; 3:3). τὸ πάσχα the Passover meal, esp. the Passover lamb (2 Esdr 6:21; 2 Ch 30:18; ESchürer, Über φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα 1883; Dalman, Jesus 81f) Mt 26:17; Mk 14:12, 14; Lk 22:8, 11, 15; J 18:28. κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν 1 Cor 11:20. ἄρτον ἐσθίειν eat a meal, w. bread as its main part (Ex 2:20; 1 Km 20:34; 2 Km 9:7; 3 Km 13:15 al.) Mt 15:2; Mk 3:20; 7:2, 5; Lk 14:1 (s. Billerb. IV 611–39: E. altjüd. Gastmahl); of the end-time banquet Lk 14:15 (cp. ἄρτον ζωῆς JosAs 15:4). τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ἄρτον ἐ. eat one’s own bread 2 Th 3:12. ἄρτον φαγεῖν παρά τινος eat someone’s bread vs. 8. τὰ παρά τινος what someone provides Lk 10:7. Neg. οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδέν he ate nothing at all Lk 4:2 (cp. Job 21:25 οὐ φαγὼν οὐδὲν ἀγαθόν; En 15:11 πνεύματα … μηδὲν ἐσθίοντα). Of complete abstinence μὴ ἐσθίων ἄρτον μήτε πίνων οἶνον 7:33. οὔτε ἐπὶ τὸ φαγεῖν οὔτε ἐπὶ τὸ πεῖν AcPl Ox 6, 7=Aa 241, 12f. οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινόν I have never eaten anything common at all Ac 10:14 (cp. 1 Macc 1:62; Just., D. 20, 3). Allegorical interpretation of Mosaic laws against eating forbidden foods B 10 (cp. Hierocles 26 p. 480 reinterpretation of the Pythagorean laws against forbidden foods as moral laws).—Of animals (Hom. et al.; Aelian, VH 1, 1; 2, 40; 3 Km 13:28; Is 65:25; Da 4:33 Theod.; GrBar 4:5 [δράκων]; 6:11 [Φοῖνιξ): birds τὰς σάρκας τινός eat someone’s flesh (Gen 40:19) Rv 17:16; 19:18. Swine Lk 15:16 (ὧν here is for ἅ by attraction, not a gen. dependent on ἐ., as it prob. is in X., Hell. 3, 3, 6; Ps.-Lucian, Asin. 21; such a constr. would be unique in our lit.).
    w. prepositions, to denote the thing of which one partakes:
    α. w. ἀπό τινος (Lev 22:6; Num 15:19; Dt 14:12, 19; Pr 13:2; Da 4:33a; ApcSed 4:5; ApcMos 17 al.) dogs: ἐ. ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων eat the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28 (on the pl. ἐσθίουσιν after the neut. κυνάρια cp. Lk 11:7; 1 Cl 42:2; B-D-F §133; s. Rob. 403f). ἀπὸ τραπέζης partake of a meal D 11:9. ἀπὸ τῆς εὐχαριστίας 9:5.
    β. w. ἔκ τινος of/from someth. (Jdth 12:2; Sir 11:19; JosAs 16:7f; ApcMos 16f) ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου eat (some of) the bread (2 Km 12:3; Tob 1:10; TestJob 7:10 ἐκ τῶν ἄρτων μου) 1 Cor 11:28; cp. J 6:26, 50f. ἐκ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν Hs 9, 1, 10. ἐκ τοῦ γάλακτος τῆ ποίμνη get sustenance fr. the milk of the flock 1 Cor 9:7. ἐκ τ. θυσιαστηρίου Hb 13:10. ἐκ τ. ξύλου τ. ζωῆς from the tree of life Rv 2:7 (s. En 32:6); cp. μηκέτι ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι (v.l. φάγῃ) Mk 11:14.
    used with other prep. expressions ἐ. μετά τινος eat w. someone (1 Km 9:19; Jdth 12:11; Job 1:4; Ezk 47:22; TestAbr B 4 p. 109, 10 [Stone p. 66]) Mt 9:11; 24:49; Mk 2:16; 14:18 (cp. Ps 40:10); Lk 5:30; 7:36. ἐνώπιόν τινος in someone’s presence (cp. ἐναντίον τ. θεοῦ Ex 18:12; Ezk 44:3) 13:26; 24:43. ἐπὶ τ. τραπέζης τινός at someone’s table (2 Km 9:11; cp. vs. 13; Da 11:27) Lk 22:30. διὰ προσκόμματος ἐ. eat with offense (i.e. so that one takes offense in doing so; perh. also so that one gives offense) Ro 14:20.
    abs. Mt 12:1; 14:20; 26:21, 26; Mk 7:3f; 14:18a, 22; Ac 27:35; D 12:3; B 7:5 al. Used w. λαμβάνειν (Gen 3:22) λάβετε φάγετε Mt 26:26b; οἱ ἐσθίοντες 14:21; 15:38. φάγωμεν κ. πίωμεν let us eat and drink 1 Cor 15:32 (Is 22:13; Ath., R. 72, 11). φάγε, πίε, εὐφραίνου Lk 12:19 (Aristobulus of Cass. [III B.C.]: 139 Fgm. 9 Jac. [cited in Strabo 14, 5, 9], statue of Sardanapalus w. the ins ἔσθιε, πῖνε, παῖζε• ὡς τἆλλα τούτου οὐκ ἄξια=‘Eat, drink, have fun. There’s nothing like it.’ This saying of Sardanapalus is also found in Arrian, Anab. 2, 5, 4. A similar thought in the Phrygian grave-ins: IGal 78, 11ff). τὸ φαγεῖν eating Mt 15:20; 1 Cor 11:21. διδόναι τινὶ φαγεῖν give someone someth. to eat (Ex 16:8, 15; Num 11:18, 21) Mt 14:16; 25:35, 42; Mk 5:43; 6:37; Lk 8:55; 9:13; J 6:52; Rv 2:7. φέρειν τινὶ φαγεῖν (cp. 2 Km 17:29) J 4:33. εὐκαιρέω φαγεῖν I find time to eat Mk 6:31. ἔχω βρῶσιν φαγεῖν I have food to eat J 4:32.—With the principle stated in 2 Th 3:10 cp. Lucian, Par. 13: when a pupil progresses well δότε αὐτῷ φαγεῖν; when he does not, μὴ δῶτε.
    ἐ. and πίνω are freq. found together, as in some pass. already quoted (Hom. et al.; very oft. LXX; En 102:9; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 16 [Stone p. 10]; B 5 p. 109, 16 [Stone p. 66]; JosAs 9:3 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. ins 113; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 234).
    α. = receive support 1 Cor 9:4.
    β. = eat a meal Lk 5:30; 17:8; 1 Cor 11:22; AcPl Ox 6, 7. Of a festive sacrificial meal 1 Cor 10:7 (Ex 32:6).
    γ. in contrast to fasting—the latter expressed by ἐ. and πίνω w. a neg. (Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 141 οὔτε πίνων οὔτε ἐσθίων) Mt 11:18; Lk 4:2 v.l.; 7:33; Ac 9:9; 23:12, 21—Mt 11:19; Lk 5:33; 7:34; B 7:5.
    δ. of ordinary daily activities Lk 17:27f.
    ε. of carefree, even luxurious or dissipated living Mt 24:49; Lk 12:19, 45; 1 Cor 15:32 (cp. Is 22:13).—HRiesenfeld, ConNeot 9, ’44, 10f.
    to do away with completely, fig. extension of mng. 1 (Hom. et al.; LXX) consume, devour (of fire Il. 23, 182; Is 10:17; 26:11) πυρὸς ἐσθίειν μέλλοντος τ. ὑπεναντίους fire, which is about to consume the adversaries Hb 10:27 (Is 26:11). ὁ ἰὸς … φάγεται τ. σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ the rust will eat your flesh like fire Js 5:3 (cp. Aeschyl., Fgm. 253 φαγέδαινα [an ulcer] σάρκας ἐσθίει ποδός; Is 30:27 ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ θυμοῦ ὡς πῦρ ἔδεται). B. 327.—DELG s.v. ἔδω. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐσθίω

См. также в других словарях:

  • Will — • This article discusses will in its psychological aspect Catholic Encyclopedia. Kevin Knight. 2006. Will     Will     † …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • complete review — complete review[1] is a literary website founded in March 1999.[2][3] It is best known for reviews of novels in English translation, in particular drawing attention to otherwise neglected contemporary works from around the world, but there are… …   Wikipedia

  • Will Young — Nom William Robert Young Naissance 20 janvier 1979 (1979 01 20) (32 ans) Wokingham, Berkshire (Angleterre) Pays d’origine …   Wikipédia en Français

  • give a man rope enough and he will hang himself — Rope is used both literally, and figuratively ‘licence, freedom’. 1639 T. FULLER Holy War v. vii. They were suffered to have rope enough, till they had haltered themselves. 1670 J. RAY English Proverbs 148 Give a thief rope enough, and he’ll hang …   Proverbs new dictionary

  • Complete lattice — In mathematics, a complete lattice is a partially ordered set in which all subsets have both a supremum (join) and an infimum (meet). Complete lattices appear in many applications in mathematics and computer science. Being a special instance of… …   Wikipedia

  • Will (law) — Last Will redirects here. For the 2011 film, see Last Will (film). Wills, trusts …   Wikipedia

  • Will Smith — Pour les articles homonymes, voir Smith. Will Smith …   Wikipédia en Français

  • Will-o'-the-wisp — For other uses, see Will o the wisp (disambiguation). Will o the wisp Phenomenon An 1882 oil painting of a will o the wisp by Arnold Böcklin See also …   Wikipedia

  • Will & Grace — Infobox Television show name = Will Grace caption = rated = format = Sitcom runtime = approx. 23 minutes creator = David Kohan Max Mutchnick director = James Burrows starring = Eric McCormack Debra Messing Sean Hayes Megan Mullally Shelley… …   Wikipedia

  • complete street — n. A street designed to accommodate various forms of transportation, including cars, public transit, bicycles, and pedestrians. Example Citations: A key tool in the process would be a complete streets that says when roadways are being constructed …   New words

  • Will the Real Jerry Lewis Please Sit Down — Infobox Television show name = Will the Real Jerry Lewis Please Sit Down caption = show name 2 = genre = creator = director = Hal Sutherland creative director = developer = presenter = Filmation starring = voices = Howard Morris Jane Webb David… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»